92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

318
Tekla Structures Modeling Guide Product version 18.0 February 2012 © 2012 Tekla Corporation

Transcript of 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Page 1: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tekla StructuresModeling Guide

Product version 18.0

February 2012

© 2012 Tekla Corporation

Page 2: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

© 2012 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.

In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.

Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla NIS, Tekla DMS, Tekla Municipality GIS, and Tekla Civil are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.

Portions of this software:

D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.

EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.

XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.

Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.

DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.

FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.

The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368, 7,617,076, 7,765,240, 7,809,533, 8,022,953, 8,041,744 and 8,046, 210. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent applications 2005285881, 20110102463 and 20120022848.

Page 3: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

3

Conventions used in this guideTypographical

conventionsThe following typographical conventions are used in this guide:

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

Font Usage

Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and button names, and list items.

Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context for the first time.

Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.

This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any text that you should type yourself.

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can also point you to other information in this guide that you might find useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.

Page 4: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

4

Conventions used in this guide ..............................................................................................................3

1 Creating 3D models...................................................................................... 17

1.1 What is a 3D model ............................................................................................................ 171.2 Creating a new model......................................................................................................... 181.3 Opening a model ................................................................................................................. 191.4 Saving a model .................................................................................................................... 19

Saving a model with a different name or location............................................................................ 201.5 Model templates ................................................................................................................. 20

Creating a model template ....................................................................................................................... 21Modifying a model template .................................................................................................................... 22

2 Setting up the workspace ........................................................................... 23

2.1 Screen layout....................................................................................................................... 23Changing the background color .............................................................................................................. 25Background color examples...................................................................................................................... 25

2.2 Work area ............................................................................................................................ 27Defining the work area .............................................................................................................................. 27Hiding the work area .................................................................................................................................. 27

2.3 Work plane .......................................................................................................................... 28Shifting the work plane ............................................................................................................................. 28Restoring the default work plane ........................................................................................................... 29Changing the color of the work plane grid .......................................................................................... 29

2.4 Coordinate system............................................................................................................... 292.5 Grids ..................................................................................................................................... 30

Creating a grid.............................................................................................................................................. 31Grid coordinates ................................................................................................................................... 31Grid labels .............................................................................................................................................. 32

Modifying a grid........................................................................................................................................... 32Deleting a grid .............................................................................................................................................. 32Changing the grid color ............................................................................................................................. 33Grid lines ........................................................................................................................................................ 33

Creating a single grid line ................................................................................................................. 34Modifying a single grid line .............................................................................................................. 34Deleting a single grid line .................................................................................................................. 34

2.6 Views .................................................................................................................................... 34Should I model in a 3D or plane view?.................................................................................................. 35Creating a view ............................................................................................................................................ 36

About naming views ............................................................................................................................ 36View types .............................................................................................................................................. 37

Page 5: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

5

View planes ............................................................................................................................................ 37Moving a view plane ........................................................................................................................... 38Creating grid views .............................................................................................................................. 39Creating a surface view ...................................................................................................................... 39

Opening a view............................................................................................................................................. 41Modifying a view ......................................................................................................................................... 41Deleting a view............................................................................................................................................. 41Switching between open views ............................................................................................................... 42Switching between 3D and plane view................................................................................................. 42Refreshing views .......................................................................................................................................... 42Arranging views ........................................................................................................................................... 42

2.7 Construction objects........................................................................................................... 43Creating a construction plane ................................................................................................................. 43Creating a construction line..................................................................................................................... 44Creating a construction circle.................................................................................................................. 44

2.8 Points.................................................................................................................................... 45Creating a point ........................................................................................................................................... 45Importing points .......................................................................................................................................... 45

3 Defining project information ...................................................................... 47

4 Importing reference models ........................................................................ 51

4.1 Inserting a reference model............................................................................................... 514.2 Modifying reference model properties ............................................................................. 534.3 Hiding a reference model................................................................................................... 534.4 Highlighting a reference model......................................................................................... 534.5 Updating reference models ................................................................................................ 544.6 Detecting changes in a reference model .......................................................................... 544.7 Viewing reference model layers......................................................................................... 554.8 Examining the contents of a reference model ................................................................ 564.9 Reference model objects .................................................................................................... 57

Splitting a reference model into reference model objects .............................................................. 584.10 Supported DGN objects ...................................................................................................... 58

5 Creating and modifying structures............................................................. 61

5.1 About parts.......................................................................................................................... 61Part handles .................................................................................................................................................. 61Part labels ...................................................................................................................................................... 62

Showing part labels in a view .......................................................................................................... 63

Page 6: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

6

5.2 Creating and modifying parts ........................................................................................... 63Modifying the position of a part ............................................................................................................. 64Modifying the shape of a part ................................................................................................................. 65Modifying the length of a part ................................................................................................................ 66Changing the profile of a part ................................................................................................................. 67

Standard profiles .................................................................................................................................. 67Parametric profiles ............................................................................................................................... 68User-defined profiles ........................................................................................................................... 68

Changing the material of a part.............................................................................................................. 68Changing the color of a part .................................................................................................................... 69

5.3 Steel parts............................................................................................................................ 69Creating a steel column............................................................................................................................. 69Creating a steel beam................................................................................................................................. 70Creating a steel polybeam......................................................................................................................... 70Creating a curved beam............................................................................................................................. 71Creating a contour plate ........................................................................................................................... 71

Creating a round contour plate ....................................................................................................... 72Creating an orthogonal beam .................................................................................................................. 72Creating a twin profile ............................................................................................................................... 73

5.4 Assemblies............................................................................................................................ 73Creating an assembly ................................................................................................................................. 74

Creating a sub-assembly .................................................................................................................... 74Using bolts to create assemblies ..................................................................................................... 74Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ........................................................................ 74Using welds to create assemblies .................................................................................................... 75Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ...................................................................... 75

Adding objects to assemblies ................................................................................................................... 76Assembly hierarchy .............................................................................................................................. 76Adding parts to an assembly ............................................................................................................ 77Creating a nested assembly .............................................................................................................. 77Joining assemblies ............................................................................................................................... 78Changing the assembly main part ................................................................................................... 78Changing the main assembly ............................................................................................................ 78

Removing objects from an assembly...................................................................................................... 78Highlighting objects in an assembly ...................................................................................................... 78Exploding an assembly ............................................................................................................................... 79Assembly examples ..................................................................................................................................... 79

5.5 Concrete parts ..................................................................................................................... 80Creating a pad footing ............................................................................................................................... 81Creating a strip footing.............................................................................................................................. 81Creating a concrete column ..................................................................................................................... 81Creating a concrete beam......................................................................................................................... 82Creating a concrete polybeam................................................................................................................. 82Creating a concrete slab............................................................................................................................ 83

Page 7: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

7

Creating a round slab .......................................................................................................................... 83Creating a concrete panel ......................................................................................................................... 84

5.6 Cast units ............................................................................................................................. 84Creating a cast unit .................................................................................................................................... 85Adding objects to cast units..................................................................................................................... 85

Adding concrete objects to a cast unit .......................................................................................... 85Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit ................................................................................ 86Changing the cast unit main part ................................................................................................... 86

Removing objects from a cast unit......................................................................................................... 86Highlighting objects in a cast unit ......................................................................................................... 86Exploding a cast unit .................................................................................................................................. 87Defining the cast unit type ....................................................................................................................... 87Casting direction.......................................................................................................................................... 87

Defining the casting direction of a part ........................................................................................ 88Showing the top-in-form face ......................................................................................................... 89

6 Detailing structures ..................................................................................... 91

6.1 Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 91Creating a bolt group ................................................................................................................................. 92

Bolt group shape .................................................................................................................................. 92Bolt group position .............................................................................................................................. 93Bolt offsets ............................................................................................................................................. 93

Creating a single bolt ................................................................................................................................. 94Changing or adding bolted parts ............................................................................................................ 94

6.2 Holes..................................................................................................................................... 94Creating round holes .................................................................................................................................. 95Creating slotted holes ................................................................................................................................ 95Creating oversized holes............................................................................................................................ 96

6.3 Welds.................................................................................................................................... 97Creating a weld between parts................................................................................................................ 97

Weld position ........................................................................................................................................ 98Weld size prefixes ................................................................................................................................ 99

Creating a polygon weld............................................................................................................................ 99Creating a weld to a part ....................................................................................................................... 100Weld preparation ...................................................................................................................................... 100

Manually preparing a part for welding ....................................................................................... 1016.4 Surface treatment ............................................................................................................ 101

Modifying surface treatment properties............................................................................................ 102Adding surface treatment to parts ...................................................................................................... 103

Adding surface treatment to a selected area ........................................................................... 103Adding surface treatment to a part face ................................................................................... 103Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part ....................................................................... 103

Page 8: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

8

Adding surface treatment to cut faces ....................................................................................... 103Surface treatment on chamfered parts ...................................................................................... 104Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses ...................................................... 104

Creating new surface treatment options........................................................................................... 105Tiled surface treatment........................................................................................................................... 106

Creating new tile patterns .............................................................................................................. 106Example pattern definition ............................................................................................................ 107Tile pattern definitions .................................................................................................................... 109Tile pattern elements ....................................................................................................................... 110

6.5 Fine-tuning part shape..................................................................................................... 110Chamfers ..................................................................................................................................................... 111

Chamfering part corners ................................................................................................................. 111Corner chamfer types and dimensions ........................................................................................ 112Polybeam chamfers .......................................................................................................................... 112Chamfering part edges .................................................................................................................... 113

Fittings......................................................................................................................................................... 114Creating a fitting ............................................................................................................................... 114

Cuts............................................................................................................................................................... 115Line cuts ............................................................................................................................................... 115Polygon cuts ....................................................................................................................................... 116Part cuts ............................................................................................................................................... 116Cutting parts with a line ................................................................................................................. 117Cutting parts with a polygon ......................................................................................................... 117Cutting parts with another part ................................................................................................... 118

Modifying the shape of a polygon....................................................................................................... 118Warping concrete parts .......................................................................................................................... 119

Warping a concrete beam using deformation angles ............................................................. 119Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers ......................................................................... 119Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab ....................................................................................................... 120

Cambering parts........................................................................................................................................ 121Cambering a part .............................................................................................................................. 121

6.6 Combining parts ................................................................................................................ 121Combining two parts into one .............................................................................................................. 122Attaching a part to another part ......................................................................................................... 122

6.7 Splitting parts ................................................................................................................... 123Splitting a straight or curved part ....................................................................................................... 123Splitting a plate or slab .......................................................................................................................... 123

7 Examining the model ................................................................................ 125

7.1 Viewing the model ............................................................................................................ 125Zooming the model .................................................................................................................................. 125

Modifying the zoom settings ......................................................................................................... 126

Page 9: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

9

Zooming with keyboard shortcuts ................................................................................................ 126Rotating the model .................................................................................................................................. 126Moving the model .................................................................................................................................... 127Flying through the model....................................................................................................................... 128Creating a clip plane................................................................................................................................ 129Creating a screenshot.............................................................................................................................. 129

Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista .................................................................................... 130Saving a screenshot in bitmap format ........................................................................................ 130Printing a screenshot ....................................................................................................................... 130

Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model ....................................................................................... 1317.2 Showing and hiding objects............................................................................................. 131

Defining which objects are displayed ................................................................................................. 132Representation options ........................................................................................................................... 132Hiding selected parts ............................................................................................................................... 134Hiding unselected parts .......................................................................................................................... 134Showing parts with exact lines ............................................................................................................ 135Showing parts with high accuracy ...................................................................................................... 136Showing and hiding assemblies ........................................................................................................... 136Showing and hiding components......................................................................................................... 137Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options ...................................................................... 137Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options......................................................... 138Object groups............................................................................................................................................. 138

Creating an object group ................................................................................................................ 138Copying an object group to another model .............................................................................. 139Deleting an object group ................................................................................................................ 139

Object representation settings.............................................................................................................. 139Creating object representation settings ..................................................................................... 140Defining your own colors to model object groups .................................................................. 141Copying object representation settings to another model ................................................... 142Deleting object representation settings ..................................................................................... 143

7.3 Visualizing project status ................................................................................................. 143Creating a visualization .......................................................................................................................... 143Copying visualization settings to another model............................................................................ 144Deleting visualization settings.............................................................................................................. 144Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project .............................................................. 144

Example: Defining an erection schedule .................................................................................... 145Example: Creating object groups .................................................................................................. 145Example: Creating object representation settings .................................................................. 146Example: Creating visualization settings ................................................................................... 146Example: Visualizing the erection schedule .............................................................................. 147

Page 10: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

10

8 Checking the model .................................................................................. 151

8.1 Inquiring the model .......................................................................................................... 151Inquiring object properties..................................................................................................................... 151

Object property report templates ................................................................................................. 151Using the Custom Inquiry tool.............................................................................................................. 152

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool ...................................................................... 152Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool .................................................................................. 153

8.2 Measuring objects............................................................................................................. 153Measuring distances ................................................................................................................................ 154Measuring angles...................................................................................................................................... 154Measuring arcs .......................................................................................................................................... 154Measuring bolt spacing........................................................................................................................... 155

8.3 Detecting clashes .............................................................................................................. 156Clash Check Manager .............................................................................................................................. 156

Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager ............................................................................ 157Symbols used in clash checking .................................................................................................... 158Managing the list of clashes .......................................................................................................... 159Changing the status of clashes ..................................................................................................... 159Changing the priority of clashes ................................................................................................... 160Grouping clashes ............................................................................................................................... 160Ungrouping clashes .......................................................................................................................... 161Viewing the details of a clash ....................................................................................................... 161Adding comments to a clash ......................................................................................................... 161Modifying a clash comment .......................................................................................................... 162Removing a clash comment ........................................................................................................... 162Viewing the history of a clash ....................................................................................................... 162Searching for clashes ....................................................................................................................... 163Printing a list of clashes .................................................................................................................. 163Previewing a list of clashes before printing .............................................................................. 163Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation ........................................................... 164Opening and saving clash check sessions .................................................................................. 164

Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts .............................................................................. 165Reverting to the old clash checking functionality .......................................................................... 166

8.4 Diagnosing and repairing the model ............................................................................... 166Diagnose and repair model results ...................................................................................................... 167

8.5 Comparing parts or assemblies ........................................................................................ 1678.6 Finding distant objects ..................................................................................................... 1678.7 Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model .................................................................. 168

9 Numbering the model ............................................................................... 169

9.1 What is numbering ........................................................................................................... 169

Page 11: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

11

9.2 What affects numbering .................................................................................................. 170Identical parts............................................................................................................................................ 170Identical reinforcements......................................................................................................................... 171User-defined attributes in numbering................................................................................................ 171

9.3 Defining numbering series ............................................................................................... 171Planning your numbering series ........................................................................................................... 172Assigning a numbering series to a part.............................................................................................. 172Assigning a numbering series to an assembly.................................................................................. 173Family numbers ......................................................................................................................................... 173

Assigning family numbers .............................................................................................................. 173Changing the family number of an object ................................................................................. 174

Overlapping numbering series............................................................................................................... 1749.4 Numbering objects............................................................................................................ 174

Numbering assemblies and cast units ................................................................................................ 175Assembly position numbers ............................................................................................................ 175

Numbering reinforcements .................................................................................................................... 176Saving preliminary numbers .................................................................................................................. 176Control numbers ....................................................................................................................................... 176

Assigning control numbers to parts ............................................................................................. 177Control number order ...................................................................................................................... 177Displaying control numbers in the model .................................................................................. 178Removing control numbers ............................................................................................................ 179Locking and unlocking control numbers .................................................................................... 179Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order ....................................... 180

Changing numbers ................................................................................................................................... 182Clearing numbers...................................................................................................................................... 182Creating a standard-part model........................................................................................................... 183

9.5 Viewing the numbering history ....................................................................................... 1849.6 Repairing numbering errors ............................................................................................. 1849.7 Numbering examples ........................................................................................................ 185

Example: Numbering identical beams ................................................................................................ 185Example: Using family numbers ........................................................................................................... 185Example: Numbering selected part types .......................................................................................... 186Example: Numbering parts in selected phases................................................................................. 187Example: Numbering settings during a project ............................................................................... 188

10 Advanced modeling ................................................................................... 189

10.1 Organizing the model ....................................................................................................... 189Creating logical areas.............................................................................................................................. 191Creating object type categories............................................................................................................ 191Modifying logical areas and object type categories....................................................................... 191Modifying the object pane..................................................................................................................... 192

Page 12: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

12

Classifying objects in object type categories.................................................................................... 193Viewing logical areas and object type categories ........................................................................... 193Deleting logical areas and object type categories .......................................................................... 194

10.2 Phases................................................................................................................................. 194Dividing the model into phases ............................................................................................................ 195Custom phase properties ........................................................................................................................ 195

10.3 Sequences .......................................................................................................................... 195Creating a sequence................................................................................................................................. 196Adding parts to a sequence ................................................................................................................... 196Checking the sequence of a part.......................................................................................................... 197Modifying the sequence number of a part........................................................................................ 197Deleting a sequence................................................................................................................................. 197

10.4 Lotting................................................................................................................................ 197Creating a lot ............................................................................................................................................. 198Adding parts to a lot................................................................................................................................ 198Removing parts from a lot ..................................................................................................................... 199Deleting a lot ............................................................................................................................................. 199

10.5 Parametric modeling......................................................................................................... 199Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures ............................................................................ 200

I profiles ............................................................................................................................................... 200I beams (steel) .................................................................................................................................... 201L profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 201Z profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 201U profiles ............................................................................................................................................. 202C profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 202T profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 203Welded box profiles .......................................................................................................................... 204Welded beam profiles ...................................................................................................................... 204Box profiles ......................................................................................................................................... 206WQ profiles ......................................................................................................................................... 207Rectangular sections ........................................................................................................................ 207Circular sections ................................................................................................................................ 207Rectangular hollow sections .......................................................................................................... 207Circular hollow sections .................................................................................................................. 208Cold rolled profiles ............................................................................................................................ 208Folded plates ...................................................................................................................................... 211Hat profiles ......................................................................................................................................... 217I beams (concrete) ............................................................................................................................ 218Ledger beams (concrete) ................................................................................................................. 219T profiles (concrete) .......................................................................................................................... 220Irregular beams (concrete) ............................................................................................................. 221Panels ................................................................................................................................................... 223Variable cross sections .................................................................................................................... 226Others ................................................................................................................................................... 228

Page 13: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

13

10.6 Sketched cross sections.................................................................................................... 229Opening the cross section sketch editor ............................................................................................ 229

Sketch Browser .................................................................................................................................. 230Variables .............................................................................................................................................. 231

Sketching the outline of a cross section............................................................................................ 232Sketching a polyline ......................................................................................................................... 232Sketching an arc ................................................................................................................................ 233Sketching a circle .............................................................................................................................. 233

Refining the shape of a sketched cross section............................................................................... 234Adding a parallel constraint ........................................................................................................... 234Adding a perpendicular constraint ............................................................................................... 235Adding a coincident constraint ..................................................................................................... 235Adding a fixed constraint ............................................................................................................... 236Adding a horizontal constraint ..................................................................................................... 236Adding a vertical constraint ........................................................................................................... 237Deleting a constraint ....................................................................................................................... 237

Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section .............................................................................. 237Adding a radial dimension to a sketch ....................................................................................... 238Adding an angle dimension to a sketch ..................................................................................... 239Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch ............................................................. 239Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch ............................................................................... 240Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch .................................................................................... 240Deleting a dimension from a sketch ............................................................................................ 241

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section............................................................. 241Part positioning planes .................................................................................................................... 241Connection positioning planes ...................................................................................................... 242Showing and hiding positioning planes ..................................................................................... 243Moving positioning planes ............................................................................................................. 243Moving positioning plane handles ............................................................................................... 244Reverting to default positioning planes ..................................................................................... 245

Checking a sketched cross section ...................................................................................................... 245Saving a sketched cross section ........................................................................................................... 246Modifying a sketched cross section .................................................................................................... 246

Modifying chamfers in a sketch ................................................................................................... 247Setting the sketch thickness .......................................................................................................... 247Cross section extrusion types ........................................................................................................ 248

Using sketched cross sections in a model ......................................................................................... 249Creating an image of a sketched cross section ........................................................................ 249

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections........................................................................... 250Importing sketched cross sections ............................................................................................... 250Exporting sketched cross sections ................................................................................................ 251

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section............................................................... 251Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section .......................................................................... 252Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section .................................................................. 253

Page 14: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

14

Example: Setting the cross section thickness ........................................................................... 254Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section ......................................................... 255Example: Using the cross section in a model ............................................................................ 256

11 Modeling settings...................................................................................... 259

11.1 General settings ................................................................................................................ 259Grid properties........................................................................................................................................... 259Grid line properties................................................................................................................................... 260Point properties......................................................................................................................................... 260Rotation settings ...................................................................................................................................... 261Screenshot settings.................................................................................................................................. 261

11.2 View and representation settings.................................................................................... 262View properties.......................................................................................................................................... 262

Default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit view properties ................................................................................................................ 263

Grid view properties................................................................................................................................. 264Display settings ......................................................................................................................................... 264Color settings for parts ........................................................................................................................... 265Color settings for object groups........................................................................................................... 266Transparency settings for object groups ............................................................................................ 267

11.3 Part properties................................................................................................................... 267Steel column properties.......................................................................................................................... 267Steel beam properties.............................................................................................................................. 268Contour plate properties......................................................................................................................... 269Orthogonal beam properties.................................................................................................................. 270Twin profile properties ............................................................................................................................ 271Pad footing properties............................................................................................................................. 272Strip footing properties........................................................................................................................... 272Concrete column properties .................................................................................................................. 273Concrete beam properties ...................................................................................................................... 274Concrete slab properties......................................................................................................................... 275Concrete panel properties ...................................................................................................................... 276User-defined attributes........................................................................................................................... 277

11.4 Part position settings ....................................................................................................... 277Position on the work plane .................................................................................................................... 277Rotation....................................................................................................................................................... 279Position depth............................................................................................................................................ 279Vertical position ........................................................................................................................................ 281Horizontal position................................................................................................................................... 282End offsets .................................................................................................................................................. 284

11.5 Detail properties................................................................................................................ 285Bolt properties ........................................................................................................................................... 285

Page 15: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Contents

15

Weld properties ......................................................................................................................................... 287List of weld types...................................................................................................................................... 289Corner chamfer properties ..................................................................................................................... 291Edge chamfer properties......................................................................................................................... 291

11.6 Numbering settings........................................................................................................... 292General numbering settings .................................................................................................................. 292Weld numbering settings ....................................................................................................................... 293Control number settings......................................................................................................................... 294

12 Modeling tips............................................................................................. 297

12.1 General modeling tips....................................................................................................... 297Right-hand rule......................................................................................................................................... 297Activating an overlapping view............................................................................................................ 297Hiding cut lines in a view....................................................................................................................... 298Cutting efficiently .................................................................................................................................... 298Creating a radial grid............................................................................................................................... 299Finding RGB values for colors ............................................................................................................... 300Showing part reference lines in model views................................................................................... 300

12.2 Tips for creating and positioning parts .......................................................................... 300Defining default part properties........................................................................................................... 301Creating curved parts .............................................................................................................................. 301Creating horizontal parts ....................................................................................................................... 302Creating beams close to each other.................................................................................................... 302Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab .......................................................................... 302Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams ......................................................... 303Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern .......................................................................... 304Optional ways of placing objects in a model.................................................................................... 304Displaying objects connected to a part.............................................................................................. 304Modeling identical areas ........................................................................................................................ 305

Page 16: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

16

Page 17: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

What is a 3D modelCreating 3D models 17

1 Creating 3D models

This section explains how to open, create, and save models in Tekla Structures.

Contents • What is a 3D model (17)• Creating a new model (18)

• Opening a model (19)

• Saving a model (19)• Model templates (20)

1.1 What is a 3D modelUsing Tekla Structures, you can create a real-life model of any structure. The 3D model contains all the information that is needed to manufacture and construct the structure, including:

• Geometry and dimensions

• Profiles and cross sections• Connection types

• Materials

The 3D model is the single source of information for drawings and other outputs, such as reports and NC data files. This ensures that the information in drawings and reports is always up to date, as they react to modifications in the model.

Page 18: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating a new modelCreating 3D models 18

See also Creating and modifying structures (61)

1.2 Creating a new modelYou need to create a model for each Tekla Structures project. This model contains all the information about the project. Each model is stored in its own folder in the TeklaStructuresModels folder.

To create a new model:

1. Click File > New... or .You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

2. Define where to save the new model.• To select a folder, click Browse.• To save the model in a recently used model folder, use the Save in list box.

• To define the location manually, type the path in the Save in field, followed by the \ character. Do not enter the model name in this field.

3. Type a unique name in the Model name field.Do not use special characters (/ \ ; : | ).

4. Optional: In the Model template list box, select the template you want to use.

Page 19: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Opening a modelCreating 3D models 19

5. In the Model type list box, define whether the model may be used by one person or shared by many.• Single-user: model will be used by one person.

• Multi-user: model is stored on a server and may be used by several people. Also enter the name of the server in the Server field.

6. Click OK.Tekla Structures creates the model and opens the default model view.

See also Model templates (20)

Multi-user mode

1.3 Opening a modelTo open a Tekla Structures model:

1. Click File > Open... or .You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

2. In the Open dialog box, select the model.• To open a recently used model, use the Model name list box.• To open a recently used model folder, use the Look in list box.

• To search for models in another folder, click Browse...

3. Click OK to open the model.If no views are visible after you have opened a model, Tekla Structures prompts you to select one.

See also Creating a new model (18)

1.4 Saving a modelYou should save your model regularly to avoid losing any work. Tekla Structures also automatically saves your work at regular intervals.

To save a model, do one of the following:

• Click .• Click File > Save.

You can sort models by clicking the column titles.

When the models are sorted alphabetically by their names, you can use the keyboard to select models. For example, when you type N, Tekla Structures selects the first model starting with an N.

Page 20: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Model templatesCreating 3D models 20

See also Saving a model with a different name or location (20)

Saving in multi-user mode

Autosave

Saving a model with a different name or locationTo save a copy of a model under a different name or in a different location:

1. Click File > Save As...2. In the Save as dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save the model.3. In the Model name field, type a new name.4. Click OK.

Tekla Structures creates a new copy with a different name, but the original version of the model remains intact.

See also Saving a model (19)

1.5 Model templates

You can save your model as a model template and use the desired model settings when creating new models.

Use the File > Save as Model Template... command to create the model template. You can select which catalogs, model subfolders, drawing templates and report templates from the model are included in the model template.

The Autosave tool automatically saves your model and drawings at set intervals. To set the autosave interval, click Tools > Options > Options... > General.

When you save the model with a different name, all the GUID object identifiers of the saved model will change and be different than in the original model.

This section is for advanced users.

Only the items in the model folder can be included in the model template.

Page 21: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Model templatesCreating 3D models 21

By default, the model template folder is saved in your environment folder. For example, if your environments are stored in C:\ProgramData, the model template folder for the default environment is in C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\17.1\environments\default\model_templates. You can define a different location using the advanced option XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY. For example, you can set this advanced option to point to the same location as XS_FIRM.

When you create a new model, you can select the model template you have created from the Model template list in the New dialog box.

You can create only single-user models with model templates. If you wish to create a multi-user model using a model template, create the model in single-user mode and then switch to multi-user mode.

See also Creating a model template (21)

Modifying a model template (22)

Switching between single-user and multi-user modes

Creating a model templateWhen you create a model template, always start by creating a new empty model. This is because old models that have been used in live projects cannot be completely cleaned. They may contain excess information that increases the size of the model even if you delete all objects and drawings from the model.

You can copy the needed attribute files into the new model folder, for example, from an earlier project.

To create a model template:

1. Create a new model and give it a unique name.For example, Steel framework.

2. Add the desired part attributes, drawing attributes, profiles, materials, custom components, sketches, and so on, in the model.

3. Click File > Save as Model Template.4. Enter a name for the model template and include the desired catalogs, drawing templates,

report templates, and model subfolders.If there are no catalogs and templates in the model folder, the options are not available. Catalogs are typically located in the Environment folder. They are included in the model folder only when they have been modified.

Option in Save as Model Template dialog box

File(s)/folder(s) included into model template folder when the option is selected

Profiles profdb.bin, profitab.inp

Materials matdb.bin

Components and sketches

componentcatalog.txt, ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt, Xslib.db1, thumbnail_bitmap.arc, *.dat files, and CustomComponentDialogFiles folder

Page 22: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Model templatesCreating 3D models 22

5. Optional: Select or clear the check box to open the destination folder after creating the model template.

6. Click OK.You can now create a new model by selecting the model template from the model template list in the New dialog box.

See also Model templates (20)

Modifying a model templateTo modify an existing model template, do one of the following:

• Copy the new or updated files directly to the model template folder.• Create a new model using the existing model template and save the model as a new model

template after you have made the needed changes.

See also Model templates (20)

Bolts and bolt assemblies

screwdb.db, assdb.db

Reinforcement rebar_database.inp, RebarShapeRules.xml, rebardatabase_config.inp, rebardatabase_schedule_config.inp

Meshes mesh_database.inp

Drawing templates *.tpl files

Report templates *.rpt files

Model subfolders Lists all subfolders found in the model folder. The selected folders are included into the model template folder.

The attributes folder containing part and drawings properties is included by default.

Option in Save as Model Template dialog box

File(s)/folder(s) included into model template folder when the option is selected

Page 23: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Screen layoutSetting up the workspace 23

2 Setting up the workspace

This section explains how to set up the workspace so that you can start modeling. It also presents some basic Tekla Structures vocabulary and concepts that are needed when working with 3D models.

Contents • Screen layout (23)

• Work area (27)• Work plane (28)

• Coordinate system (29)

• Grids (30)• Views (34)

• Construction objects (43)

• Points (45)

• Importing reference models (51)

2.1 Screen layoutWhen you start Tekla Structures, a new window appears on the screen. Initially, most of the menu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open or create a model, the icons and available menu options will become active.

Page 24: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Screen layoutSetting up the workspace 24

The following illustration identifies the various areas of the Tekla Structures modeling interface:

See also Changing the background color (25)

Pull-down menus contain all the commands

Toolbars can be either docked or floating

Selection switches determine the selectable objects

Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick

Status bar displays instructions, and the status of some settings

Page 25: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Screen layoutSetting up the workspace 25

Changing the background colorYou can define the background color of model views using RGB values. You can control the color of each corner of the background separately.

To change the background color in rendered views:

1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Modify the background color using the following advanced options:

• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4

To use a single-colored background, set the same value for all four corners of the background. To use the default background color, leave the advanced option fields empty.

3. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Finding RGB values for colors (300)

Background color examples (25)

Background color examplesBelow are some examples of possible background colors that you can define. The first RGB value refers to the advanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, the second value to the advanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, and so on.

RGB values Result

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

Page 26: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Screen layoutSetting up the workspace 26

See also Changing the background color (25)

Finding RGB values for colors (300)

0.0 0.4 0.2

0.0 0.4 0.2

0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0

0.3 0.0 0.6

0.3 0.0 0.6

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

0.0 0.2 0.7

0.0 0.8 0.7

0.0 0.2 0.7

0.0 0.8 0.7

RGB values Result

Page 27: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Work areaSetting up the workspace 27

2.2 Work areaTekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines.

You can define the work area to suit particular situations, for example, to concentrate on a particular area of the model. Defining the work area makes it faster and easier to work with the model. Objects outside the work area still exist, but they are not visible.

See also Defining the work area (27)

Hiding the work area (27)

Defining the work areaYou can shrink and expand the work area by picking the corner points of the new work area, or size the work area to include selected parts, or all model objects. You can define the work area in a selected view, or in all visible views.

To define the work area:

1. Select a command from View > Fit Work Area.For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Define the work area by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Work area (27)

Hiding the work areaIf you want, you can hide the green work area box. This can be useful, for example, when creating screenshots for presentations.

1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Set the XS_HIDE_WORKAREA advanced option to TRUE.3. Click OK or Apply.4. Click View > Redraw All. Tekla Structures hides the work area.5. To make the work area visible again, set the advanced option to FALSE.

Alternatively, hold down Ctrl and Shift when clicking View > Redraw All to hide the green work area box. To make the box visible again, click View > Redraw All again.

Page 28: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Work planeSetting up the workspace 28

See also Work area (27)

2.3 Work planeThe red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the local coordinate system of the model. The work plane also has its own grid, which can be used for positioning parts. Tekla Structures displays the work plane grid in dark red color.

To display the work plane grid, select Work plane from the second list box on the Snapping toolbar.

The red arrow symbol shows the xy plane. The z direction follows the right-hand rule.

Most of the commands that are dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates. For example creating points, part positioning, and copying always comply with the work plane coordinate system. The current work plane is model-specific, so it is the same in all views.

See also Shifting the work plane (28)

Restoring the default work plane (29)

Changing the color of the work plane grid (29)

Right-hand rule (297)

Shifting the work planeYou can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the global basic planes, or on a part or view plane. When modeling sloped parts, shifting the work plane helps you to place parts accurately. For example, to model horizontal bracing and purlins in a sloped roof, you need to shift the work plane to the slope of the roof.

To shift the work plane:

1. Click View > Set Work Plane and select one of the commands.For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Shift the work plane by following the instructions on the status bar.3. Optional: In the second list box on the Snapping toolbar, select Work plane to display the work

plane grid.

To set the work plane to any part plane, go to View > Set Work Plane > Using the Workplane Tool.

Page 29: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Coordinate systemSetting up the workspace 29

See also Work plane (28)

Restoring the default work planeRemember to change back to the default work plane when you have finished modeling sloped structures.

To restore the default work plane:

1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to XY(Z) Plane...2. Set Plane to XY.3. Set Depth coordinate to 0.4. Click Change.

See also Work plane (28)

Changing the color of the work plane gridTo change the color of the work plane grid:

1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE.

Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the color to red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.

3. Click OK.4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Work plane (28)

Finding RGB values for colors (300)

2.4 Coordinate systemThe symbol with three axes (x, y, and z) represents the local coordinate system and indicates the direction of the model. It is located in the lower right corner of the model view. The coordinate symbol follows the work plane.

Page 30: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

GridsSetting up the workspace 30

The green cube symbol represents the global coordinate system and lies at the global point of origin.

See also Work plane (28)

View types (37)

2.5 GridsGrids are used as an aid in locating objects in a Tekla Structures model. A grid represents a three-dimensional complex of horizontal and vertical planes. The grid is shown on the view plane using dash-and-dot lines.

Grid origin is the point where the zero points of each coordinate axis intersect

Grid line extensions define how far the grid lines extend in each direction

Page 31: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

GridsSetting up the workspace 31

You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if you move the grid line.

You can have more than one grid in a model. So that you can easily place objects in your model, we strongly advise that you create a modular grid. You can create a large-scale grid for the entire structure, and smaller grids for some detailed sections. You can also create single grid lines and attach them to an existing grid.

See also Creating a grid (31)

Modifying a grid (32)

Deleting a grid (32)

Changing the grid color (33)

Grid lines (33)

Creating a gridWhen you create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically creates a grid and a view according to the saved standard properties. You can also create grids manually.

To manually create a grid:

1. Click Modeling > Create Grid...2. Modify the grid properties.3. Optional: To bind objects to the grid lines, select the Magnetic grid plane check box.4. Optional: When prompted, pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.

The coordinates of the picked point appear in the Grid dialog box as X0, Y0, and Z0.

If you do not pick a point, Tekla Structures positions the origin according to the values you entered for X0, Y0, and Z0.

5. Click Create.

See also Grids (30)

Grid coordinates (31)

Grid labels (32)

Grid properties (259)

Grid coordinatesThe x and y coordinates of a grid are relative. This means that the entries for x and y are always relative to the previous entry. The z coordinates are absolute, which means that entries for z are absolute distances from the work plane origin.

There are two ways to enter the x or y coordinates of grid lines:

• Define the coordinates individually. For example, 0 4000 4000.• Define several grid lines with equal spacing. For example, 0 2*4000.

Both methods create three lines with the spacing of 4000.

Grid labels are the names of the grid lines shown in views

Page 32: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

GridsSetting up the workspace 32

See also Creating a grid (31)

Coordinate system (29)

Grid labelsLabels are the names of the grid lines shown in views. The names in the X field are associated with the grid lines parallel to the y axis and vice versa. The Z field is for the names of levels parallel to the work plane. If you wish, you can leave the label fields empty.

See also Grids (30)

Creating a grid (31)

Modifying a gridTo modify a grid:

1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid dialog box appears.3. Modify the grid properties.

4. Click Modify to save the changes.

See also Grids (30)

Grid properties (259)

Deleting a gridTo delete a grid:

1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.2. Select a grid line.3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

Use a zero at the start to represent a grid on the 0,0 coordinate and spaces as separators for coordinates. You can have a maximum of 1024 characters in the coordinates field.

When working with very large grids, always having the grid labels visible might slow down Tekla Structures. To hide the grid labels when you zoom in, use the advanced option XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS.

If you have attached additional grid lines to the grid and you want to preserve them, clear the check boxes next to the coordinate fields in the Grid dialog box.

If the coordinate check boxes are selected, Tekla Structures deletes all single grid lines attached to the grid.

Page 33: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

GridsSetting up the workspace 33

See also Grids (30)

Changing the grid colorTo change the color of the grid in rendered views:

1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR.

Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the color to red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.

3. Click OK.4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Grids (30)

Finding RGB values for colors (300)

Grid linesYou can attach single grid lines to an existing grid.

Single grid lines have handles. When you select a grid line, the handles appear in magenta. You can use handles to move the grid lines.

See also Grids (30)

When you delete a grid, ensure that you do not have any other objects selected. If you have also other objects selected, Tekla Structures only deletes the objects, not the grid.

If you want to move the grid lines using the handles to make a skewed grid, you can do this only on the local XY plane of the grid.

Page 34: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 34

Creating a single grid line (34)

Modifying a single grid line (34)

Deleting a single grid line (34)

Creating a single grid lineTo create a single grid line:

1. Click Modeling > Add Grid Line.2. Select an existing grid to attach the grid line to.3. Pick the starting point of the grid line.4. Pick the end point of the grid line.

See also Grid lines (33)

Grid line properties (260)

Modifying a single grid lineTo modify a single grid line:

1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is active.2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid Line Properties dialog box appears.3. Modify the grid line properties.4. Click Modify to save the changes.

See also Grid lines (33)

Grid line properties (260)

Deleting a single grid lineTo delete a single grid line:

1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.2. Select the grid line you want to delete.3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

See also Grid lines (33)

2.6 ViewsA view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window.

There are several ways to create views in Tekla Structures. For example, you can create views:

• of the entire structure

• of selected parts and components

• of selected cast units and assemblies

• along the grid lines

When you delete a grid line, ensure that you do not have any other objects selected. If you also have other objects selected, Tekla Structures only deletes the objects, not the grid line.

Page 35: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 35

See also Creating a view (36)

Opening a view (41)

Modifying a view (41)

Deleting a view (41)

Switching between open views (42)

Switching between 3D and plane view (42)

Refreshing views (42)

Arranging views (42)

Should I model in a 3D or plane view?3D, plane, and elevation views provide different types of information, which is useful for different tasks.

One common technique is to open several views:

• A 3D view to see a real-life version of the model

• A plane view, where you can add and connect parts• An elevation view to check the level

Selecting a part in a view highlights the part in all open views.

When you need to see a specific part clearly, create a 3D view of the part. This places the part in the center of the view.

Page 36: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 36

See also Views (34)

Switching between 3D and plane view (42)

Creating a viewTo create a new view:

1. Select a view command from the View menu.For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the view by following the instructions on the status bar.3. Optional: Save the view.

a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box. b Type a unique name in the Name field.

c Click Modify.

See also Views (34)

View and representation settings (262)

Default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit view properties (263)

About naming views (36)

View types (37)

View planes (37)

Creating grid views (39)

Creating a surface view (39)

About naming viewsTekla Structures numbers views in order of creation, so you do not have to give each view a specific name.

You should give each view a unique name if you need to open it in later sessions. When you exit the model, Tekla Structures only saves the named views. Temporary views, which have a default name in parentheses, disappear when you close them.

If you are working with two screens, maximize your work area by putting the elevation and 3D views on one screen and the plane view on the other.

Temporary views have a default name in parentheses. Do not use parentheses when naming a view, or the view will not be saved for later use.

In multi-user mode, it is very important to give views unique names. If several users have different views with the same name, the view settings of one user may randomly override the settings of another user.

Page 37: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 37

See also Creating a view (36)

View typesThe view type defines the appearance of the view. It also affects which methods you can use to rotate the model.

Model views are by default rendered. In rendered views, objects look more realistic because they are non-transparent and their surfaces are displayed. You can rotate the model with the mouse in a rendered view.

See also Creating a view (36)

Representation options (132)

XS_ENABLE_WIRE_FRAME

View planesEach view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points that are located outside the view plane are red.

Basic views Basic views are those parallel to the global basic planes (xy, xz, and zy). In basic views, two axes always define the view plane and the axes appear in the plane name. The third axis is perpendicular to the view plane. It does not appear in the plane name. In the basic plane view, the model is shown from the direction of the third axis.

The view plane options for basic views are:

You can change the view type to wire frame by setting the advanced option XS_ENABLE_WIRE_FRAME to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Model View, and selecting Wireframe as the view type in the View Properties dialog box.

Plane: XY

Page 38: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 38

For basic views, you also define the distance the view plane is from the global origin in the direction of the third axis. The view plane coordinate equals this distance.

Other views For view types other than basic views, you either define the view plane and coordinate by picking points, or the points are defined automatically, depending on the creation method.

See also Moving a view plane (38)

Creating a view (36)

Moving a view planeYou can change the view plane by moving it like any other object. When you move a view plane, Tekla Structures only uses the vector that is perpendicular to the view plane.

To move the view plane:

1. Click the view.2. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear... from the pop-up menu.3. Pick the starting point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.4. Pick the end point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.5. Click Move.

See also View planes (37)

Plane: XZ

Plane: ZY

If the Move - Linear dialog box is open but the command is not active anymore, click the Pick button to re-activate the command.

Page 39: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 39

Creating grid viewsGrid views are views along the grid lines. You can define how many views Tekla Structures will create, how it will name the views, and which view properties it will use.

Before you start, create a view that contains a grid.

To create grid views:

1. Select the grid.2. Click View > Create View of Model > Along Grid Lines...3. Modify the grid properties.4. Click Create. The Views dialog box appears.5. Click the arrow buttons to show or hide the grid views.

The grid views will not be visible until you move them to the visible views in the Views dialog box.

See also Creating a view (36)

Grid view properties (264)

Creating a surface viewWith the surface view creation tools you can pick the surface of any part. Tekla Structures automatically creates a new aligned temporary view looking directly at the surface, fits the work area of the model to the selected part, and aligns the work plane to that surface or a user-selected edge of the surface.

Using the surface view creation tools makes it easier to model in bolt groups, stiffener plates, and hole penetrations on complex geometry. While you model in the newly created temporary view, you can see your modeling work being done in the original 3D view. You can easily create views along the surface of concrete panels, slabs, columns, or beams, and place embeds, formwork, or wall penetrations.

The commands are available in the Macros dialog box (Tools > Macros), and you can also add them on a toolbar (Tools > Customize).

To create a surface view using the toolbar:

1. Click one of the view creation commands:• To create a surface view from the part surface, click CreateSurfaceView and select the

surface of the part.• If creating the surface view from only selecting the surface does not align or orientate the

view along the edge, click CreateSurfaceView_wEdge and select the surface, and then pick the edge in which you want to align the view to (this means the edge that will form the X axis of the view).

Ensure that you have Snap to geometry lines /points on. This allows you to pick along an edge to define the direction.

Tekla Structures creates a new temporary view. The view plane is at the selected surface and the work plane is changed along typically the longest edge of that face unless you chose the CreateSurfaceView_wEdge command.

Page 40: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 40

2. Once the view is created, press Esc or right-click and select Interrupt to interrupt. 3. Use the WorkPlaneGlobal command to return the work plane in the model back to the origin,

aligned with the global X,Y, and Z planes of the model.

Example Below is an example of a view that has been created with the CreateSurfaceView command.

Below is an example of using the CreateSurfaceView_wEdge command. The first image shows the snap to lines arrow. The head of the arrow represents the positive direction the x axis will be set to on the work plane. The view will be rotated to this direction to form the flat horizontal edge of the view. The origin of the view and work plane will be at the start of the arrow snap line. Once you have hovered over the edge and in the correct direction, click your mouse and the new view will be created and aligned to that edge.

Page 41: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 41

See also Creating a view (36)

Opening a viewTo view and open an existing view:

1. Click View > View List....The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on the left, and all visible views on the right.

2. Select a view and use the arrows between the lists, or double-click a view to open it.

See also Views (34)

Modifying a viewTo modify an existing view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.2. Modify the view properties.3. Click Modify.

See also Views (34)

View and representation settings (262)

Deleting a viewTo delete a named view:

1. Click View > View List....

You can have up to nine views on the screen at the same time. If you try to open more than nine views, Tekla Structures displays a warning. If the view does not appear, check how many views you have open.

To open multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you select views from the list.

Page 42: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

ViewsSetting up the workspace 42

The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on the left, and all visible views on the right.

2. Select the view you want to delete.3. Click Delete.

See also Views (34)

Switching between open viewsTo switch between open views, do one of the following:

• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Tab.• On the Window menu, select a view from the list.

See also Views (34)

Switching between 3D and plane view (42)

Switching between 3D and plane viewTo switch between the 3D and the plane view, do one of the following:

• Press Ctrl+P.• Click View > Switch to 3D / Plane.• In the View Properties dialog box, select an option from the Angle list box, and then click

Modify.

See also Views (34)

Switching between open views (42)

Refreshing viewsTo refresh the screen display, do any of the following:

See also Views (34)

Arranging viewsYou can arrange views manually by dragging and dropping each view within the Tekla Structures window, or have Tekla Structures automatically arrange views.

To arrange the views, do any of the following:

To delete multiple views, use Shift or Ctrl when you select views from the list.

To Do this

Redraw the contents of the active view

Right-click the view and select Redraw View from the pop-up menu.

Redraw the contents of all the views

Click View > Redraw All.

Page 43: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Construction objectsSetting up the workspace 43

See also Views (34)

2.7 Construction objectsConstruction planes, lines, and circles help you place other objects. For example, you can easily pick the points at intersections of construction lines and circles. The snap priority of construction objects is the same as with the other lines.

Construction objects remain in the model when you update or redraw views and windows. They do not appear in drawings.

You can also create magnetic construction lines or planes to bind and move groups of objects. For example, rather than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create a construction plane that goes through all the handles and chamfers. Then make this plane magnetic and bind the plane to the appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attached handles and chamfers move with it.

See also Creating a construction plane (43)

Creating a construction line (44)

Creating a construction circle (44)

Creating a construction planeTo create a construction plane:

1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Plane.2. Pick four points.3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction Plane Properties dialog box appears.5. Type a name for the plane.6. Optional: To make the construction plane magnetic, select the Magnetic check box. 7. Click Modify.

To Do this

Arrange all open views in a stack

Click Windows > Cascade.

Arrange all open views horizontally

Click Windows > Tile Horizontally.

Arrange all open views vertically

Click Windows > Tile Vertically.

Close all the views Click View > Close All.

You cannot use the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, and Tile Vertically commands for views that you can move outside the Tekla Structures window.

For more information on how to move part and component basic views and zoom windows across the entire Windows desktop, see XS_MDIVIEWPARENT, XS_MDIZOOMPARENT, and XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.

Page 44: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Construction objectsSetting up the workspace 44

See also Construction objects (43)

Creating a construction lineTo create a construction line:

1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Line.2. Pick the starting point of the construction line.3. Pick the end point of the construction line.4. Optional: Make the construction line magnetic.

a Double-click the line in the model.b Select the Magnetic check box.c Click Modify.

See also Construction objects (43)

Creating a construction circleTo create a construction circle:

1. Select a command from Modeling > Add Construction Circle.For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the construction circle by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Construction objects (43)

Page 45: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

PointsSetting up the workspace 45

2.8 PointsYou can create points to make it easier to place objects at positions where no lines or objects intersect.

There are many ways to create points in Tekla Structures. Which method is the most convenient at each time depends on what you have already created in the model and which locations you can easily pick.

When you create points, Tekla Structures always places them according to the work plane coordinate system. Points located on the view plane are yellow and points outside the view plane are red.

See also Creating a point (45)

Importing points (45)

Point properties (260)

Creating a pointTo create a point:

1. Use the icons on the Points toolbar, or select a command from Modeling > Add Points.For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the point by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Points (45)

Importing points

You can import points to specific locations in an open Tekla Structures model using the point creation import macro. You need to specify the point coordinates in a text file. In some cases this file is generated by another software package.

To import points from a file:

1. Create a point import file.a Create a text file that consists of single lines for each point.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 46: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

PointsSetting up the workspace 46

Use commas or tabs as delimiters for the three point coordinates on a line. For example:

100,500,1000

300,700,1500

b Save the file.2. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component Catalog.3. Type point in the Search field and click Search.4. Double-click Point Creation Import (8).5. Type the ASCII file name.

Include the full path and the file extension. If you do not specify the path, Tekla Structures looks for the file in the current model folder.

6. Define the origin of the imported points by entering the coordinates.7. Click Create.

See also Points (45)

During the import process, Tekla Structures ignores all lines in the import file which do not consist of valid values delimited by tabs or commas.

Page 47: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining project information 47

3 Defining project information

You will need project information, such as the project number and name, many times during a project. Update the project information at the beginning of the project to make reports and drawings display the correct information automatically.

To define project information:

1. Click File > Project Properties....The Project Properties dialog box is displayed. It contains some sample entries, which you can overwrite.

2. Enter or update the project information. All information is optional.3. In the Description box, enter a description that helps you identify the model when you next

need to open it.The description appears in the Open dialog box when you open a model.

4. To define user-defined attributes, click User-defined attributes...:• Enter fabricator information.

• Define project standards, such as finish, material and field connection.• Define what information appears in drawings.

• Define your own fields to include in drawings and reports.

• Preview title block and bill of material styles.

5. Click OK.6. Click OK to save your changes.

Now you will get updated project properties in drawings and reports.

7. To save the project properties as the default properties for this project, click Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults.

The fields in the image below refer to template attributes, which you can use when designing your own reports and templates. To display in your reports and templates the information that you enter in this dialog box, add in the reports and templates the corresponding template attributes listed under the image.

Page 48: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining project information 48

PROJECT.NUMBER

PROJECT.NAME

PROJECT.BUILDER

PROJECT.OBJECT

PROJECT.ADDRESS

PROJECT.DESIGNER

PROJECT.DATE_START

PROJECT.DATE_END

PROJECT.INFO1

Page 49: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining project information 49

PROJECT.INFO2

Page 50: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining project information 50

Page 51: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Inserting a reference modelImporting reference models 51

4 Importing reference models

A reference model is a file that helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. A reference model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to Tekla Structures.

For example, an architectural model, a plant design model, or a heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) model can be used as a reference model. Reference models can also be simple 2D drawings that are imported and then used as a layout to directly build the model on.

The following file types are supported:

• AutoCAD (*.dxf)

• AutoCAD (*.dwg)

• MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)• Cadmatic models (*.3dd)

• IFC files (*.IFC)

• IGES files (*.igs, *.iges)

• STEP files (*.stp, *.STEP)• Tekla WebViewer XML files (*.xml)

You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from the file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the current model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is *.rop.

See also Inserting a reference model (51)

Modifying reference model properties (53)

Selecting a reference model

Hiding a reference model (53)

Highlighting a reference model (53)

Updating reference models (54)

Detecting changes in a reference model (54)

Viewing reference model layers (55)

Examining the contents of a reference model (56)

Reference model objects (57)

Supported DGN objects (58)

4.1 Inserting a reference modelTo insert a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:

Page 52: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Inserting a reference modelImporting reference models 52

1. Open a Tekla Structures model.2. Check the work plane position, as it determines the rotation of the reference model in the Tekla

Structures model.3. Click File > Insert Reference Model...4. Click the Browse... button to browse for the reference model file.5. Set the scale of the reference model if it is different from the one in the Tekla Structures model

(for example, if it uses different measurement units).

6. Click Apply.7. Pick a point to place the reference model in the Tekla Structures model.

The point you pick defines the reference model origin. The origin is displayed as a handle.

Set the scale for a DWG or a DXF file already in AutoCAD. When you define the measurement unit for a DWG or a DXF file and save the file in AutoCAD, the unit is recognized in Tekla Structures and the reference model is scaled correctly.

If the inserted reference model lies outside the work area and thus is not fully or at all visible in the model view, Tekla Structures displays the Objects outside the work area warning message. Click Expand to extend the work area to see the reference model in the model view.

To view the reference model in the model view later:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box, and then click Display....

2. Ensure that the Reference objects check box is selected, and then click Modify.

3. Right-click the view and select Fit Work Area to Entire Model from the pop-up menu.

Page 53: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Modifying reference model propertiesImporting reference models 53

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.2 Modifying reference model propertiesTo modify the properties of a reference model:

1. Click File > Reference Model List...2. Double-click the reference model to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box.3. Click User-defined attributes.4. Modify the properties and then click Modify.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.3 Hiding a reference modelTo hide a reference model:

1. Click File > Reference Model List...2. Select Hidden from the Visibility list box.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.4 Highlighting a reference modelTo check which reference models are included in the model, you can highlight them.

If you do not define a reference model file to be used, the file does not exist, or you forget to click Apply, Tekla Structures displays a default symbol for the reference model:

The symbol can also indicate that the reference model cannot be viewed because there are no visible objects in the file, or the file is corrupted or is not supported by Tekla Structures.

You can define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file. For more information on user-defined attributes, see Adding properties.

Page 54: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Updating reference modelsImporting reference models 54

To highlight a reference model:

1. Click File > Reference Model List...2. Select a reference model from the list.

The reference model is highlighted in the Tekla Structures model.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.5 Updating reference modelsYou can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have been changes in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures.

To update a reference model:

1. Double-click a reference model.2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the modified file by clicking the

Browse... button next to the File name field. 3. In the Import dialog box, select the updated file and click OK.4. Click Modify.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.6 Detecting changes in a reference modelReference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see the changes between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commands in the Reference Model Properties dialog box.

You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file formats:

• IFC (.ifc)

• Cadmatic (.3dd)

• WebViewer (.xml)• 3D DWG (.dwg)

To view changes in a reference model:

1. Double-click the reference model.

You can also update all the reference models in one go.

To update all reference models:

1. Click File > Reference Model List... to open the Reference Models dialog box.

2. Click Reload All.

Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and regenerates the reference models that have a newer modified date than the one already in the cache.

However, this is not the recommended way to update reference models since it is time-consuming and affects the system performance.

Page 55: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing reference model layersImporting reference models 55

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the name of the old file by clicking the Browse... button next to the Old file name field.

3. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection area.For example, select Inserted to see the added objects.

4. Click Display. Tekla Structures highlights the inserted reference model objects.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.7 Viewing reference model layersYou can view different layers of a reference model. This is useful if you want to for example examine only certain parts of the model.

To view reference model layers:

1. Double-click the reference model.

Page 56: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Examining the contents of a reference modelImporting reference models 56

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, click Select layers...3. Select the layers you want to view. Depending on your reference model, you could for example

select a layer that contains only windows. 4. Click OK.5. Click Modify in the Reference Model Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures highlights the

layer with windows.

See also Importing reference models (51)

4.8 Examining the contents of a reference modelYou can examine the contents of a reference model. This is useful to do for example after you have impoted a reference model into Tekla Structures.

To examine the contents of a reference model:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.2. Select the reference model, whose contents you want to examine.

The contents of the reference model are listed in the Inquire Object dialog box.

Page 57: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Reference model objectsImporting reference models 57

4.9 Reference model objectsYou can split reference models into separate reference model objects. Reference model objects can have separate user-defined attributes that can be used for reports and the view and selection filters.

The reference model objects are read-only.

Limitations The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it for example for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:

• block table

• polyface mesh

• polygon mesh• proxy object (for example, ADT)

• ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)

Page 58: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Supported DGN objectsImporting reference models 58

See also Importing reference models (51)

Selecting a reference model object

Splitting a reference model into reference model objects (58)

Splitting a reference model into reference model objectsYou can quickly split reference models into reference model objects. After you have split the reference model into reference model objects, you can use the ID number and attributes of the reference model objects for example in filtering and reports.

To split a reference model into reference model objects:

1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Model Properties dialog box.

2. Click Subdivide.

See also Reference model objects (57)

Filtering reference model object properties

4.10 Supported DGN objectsTekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:

• Line Elements (Type 3)• Line String (Type 4)

• Shape (Type 6)

• Text Nodes (Type 7)• Curve (Type 11)

• Complex Chains (Type 12)

• Complex Shapes (Type 14)• Elliptic Elements (Type 15)

• Arc Elements (Type 16)

You cannot use this functionality for DGN, STEP, or IGES files.

The advanced option XS_USE_EXACT_EXTREMA_FOR_REFERENCE_MODELS is not compatible with this feature.

When you have split the reference model into reference model objects, the ID numbers of all the reference model objects are visible in the model database, even if you remove the reference model object and update the reference model.

Page 59: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Supported DGN objectsImporting reference models 59

• Text Elements (Type 17)

• Surfaces (Type 18)

• Solids (Type 19)

• Point String Elements (Type 22)• Cone Elements (Type 23)

• B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)

• B-spline Curves (Type 27) • Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)

• Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"

See also Importing reference models (51)

The following DGN objects are not supported:

• Dimension Elements (Type 33)

• Multiline Elements (Type 36)• Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face

Loops"

SmartSolid elements are supported as WireFrame only.

Page 60: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Supported DGN objectsImporting reference models 60

Page 61: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

About partsCreating and modifying structures 61

5 Creating and modifying structures

This section explains how to create and modify parts using different materials and profiles. It also includes a general description of part properties and step-by-step instructions for all the part commands.

Contents • About parts (61)

• Creating and modifying parts (63)• Steel parts (69)

• Assemblies (73)

• Concrete parts (80)• Cast units (84)

5.1 About partsIn Tekla Structures, the term part refers to the basic building objects that can be modeled and detailed further. These are the building blocks of the physical model.

Every part has properties that define it, such as material, profile, and location. You can use part properties in view and selection filters. For example, you can select, modify, and hide parts based on their properties. You can also include part properties and user-defined attributes in drawing and report templates.

See also Part properties (267)

User-defined attributes (277)

Part handlesTekla Structures indicates the direction of a part with handles. When you select a part, Tekla Structures highlights the handles. The handle of the first end point is yellow, the rest are magenta.

Page 62: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

About partsCreating and modifying structures 62

See also Showing part reference lines in model views (300)

Part labelsYou can display selected part properties, user-defined attributes, and template attributes in a model view by using part labels.

Part labels are textual descriptions that are displayed next to the part they represent. You can define what information to display in the labels, such as the name, profile, and position number of the part.

Page 63: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 63

Example

See also Showing part labels in a view (63)

Showing part labels in a viewTo show part labels in a view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.2. Click Display...3. In the Display dialog box, go to the Advanced tab.4. Select the Part label check box.5. Define which part properties to display in part labels.

a Select a property in the Properties list.b Click Add to add the property to the Part label list.

6. Optional: Define which user-defined attribute or template attribute to display in part labels.a Select User-defined attribute in the Properties list.b Click Add. The Part label dialog box appears.c Enter the attribute name and click OK.

7. Click Modify.

See also Part labels (62)

XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR

Template Attributes Reference Guide

5.2 Creating and modifying parts Parts are created the same way as any other objects in Tekla Structures. You initiate a part command, and then you pick points to place the part in the model. For additional guidance, see the corresponding tooltips and follow the instructions on the status bar.

To modify the part properties, double-click the part or use the Mini Toolbar.

Page 64: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 64

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Modifying the shape of a part (65)

Modifying the length of a part (66)

Changing the profile of a part (67)

Changing the material of a part (68)

Changing the color of a part (69)

Tips for creating and positioning parts (300)

Mini Toolbar

Status bar

Modifying the position of a partTo modify the position of a part, do one of the following:

You can also modify a part by right-clicking the selected part and selecting Modify from the pop-up menu.

To Do this

Modify part position in the part properties dialog box

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. On the Position tab, modify the desired position

settings.For example, you can define the part to be positioned 200 units above its handles.

3. Click Modify.

Modify part position using the Mini Toolbar

1. Click in the Mini Toolbar.2. Modify the settings. The object moves in the model

accordingly.

• To change the overall position of the part, use the round selection dial. Click a sector in the dial to select a position.

• To change the rotation angle, click and drag the green rotation angle knob.

• To change the Angle, Plane offset, or Depth offset, enter a value in the corresponding box.

Page 65: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 65

See also Part position settings (277)

Mini Toolbar

Tips for creating and positioning parts (300)

Modifying the shape of a partYou can modify the shape of a part by dragging the part edges and surfaces, and by changing the part dimensions. You can modify beams, columns, pad footings, simple panels, simple strip footings, slabs, and contour plates.

To modify the shape of a part:

1. Select the part.2. Right-click and select Modify from the pop-up menu.

Tekla Structures displays the handles that you can use to modify the part. The relevant dimensions are shown when you move the mouse slowly over the part edges.

3. Optional: Hold the mouse on top of a handle to display a grid that shows the dragging direction.4. Select one of the handles.

The rotation angle knob snaps to every 45 degrees. Hold down Shift to override this.

Handle

Point handle

Point handles are located where part handles would be.

Midpoint handle

Use midpoint handles to create new point handles.

Line handle

Page 66: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 66

5. Drag the handle to the desired location.Hold down the Ctrl key to disable snapping, and to select and drag multiple points and edges.

6. Optional: To delete a handle, select it and press the Delete key.

See also Creating and modifying parts (63)

Modifying the length of a partTo modify the length of a part:

1. Select the part.Tekla Structures highlights the handles of the part.

2. Click one of the handles to select it.3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures.

See also Part handles (61)

Moving an object

Dimension end point

You can drag either the round handle or the arrow handle.

You can also change dimensions by selecting a dimension end point and entering a dimension value in the dialog box that opens when you start typing.

You can add a new point at a polybeam end, show and hide diagonal dimensions and midpoint handles, and set a handle to move in 2D or 3D direction. To do any of these, right-click a point handle and select the appropriate command on the handle toolbar

.

Handle

Do not use cuts or fittings to change the length of a part, for the following reasons:

• Cuts may cause shop errors, because cuts do not always affect part length when you export information to NC files.

• Fittings may cause problems with connections and details.

Page 67: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 67

Changing the profile of a partWhen you create or modify a part, you can select the profile from a list that contains all the profiles available in the profile catalog.

To change the profile of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.

• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

By default, only the profile types that are relevant to the material of the part are shown.

3. Optional: Define what profile information you want to see.• To display all the profiles of the profile catalog in the list, select the Show all profiles check

box.• To see all the properties of profiles, select the Show details check box.

4. Select a profile from the list.5. If the profile is parametric, define its dimensions on the General tab.

6. Click OK to close the Select Profile dialog box.7. Click Modify.

See also The profile catalog

Standard profilesWhen you first start Tekla Structures, the profile catalog contains standard, environment-specific profiles.

The properties of these library profiles conform to industry standards, so you should not edit them. You can add profiles to the profile catalog.

Standard profiles have the symbol in the profile catalog.

See also Changing the profile of a part (67)

The profile catalog

Click the Value box and replace the existing value with a new one.

Alternatively, if you know the name of the profile, you can enter it directly in the appropriate field in the part properties dialog box.

Page 68: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Creating and modifying partsCreating and modifying structures 68

Parametric profilesYou can use parametric profiles to model profiles that are standard in a specific environment, but do not exist in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. Parametric profiles are partly user-definable: they have a predefined shape, but you determine their size by giving one or more parameters.

Parametric profile names have specific prefixes and they include dimension values. Dimension values in parametric profile names are separated by the standard separators -, X, /, and *.

You can define alternative prefixes for parametric profiles. You can also define additional separators using the variables XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR and XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS .

Parametric profiles have the symbol in the profile catalog.

See also Changing the profile of a part (67)

The profile catalog

User-defined profilesYou can create your own profiles and save them in the profile catalog. For example, you could create a pitched user-defined profile, with different cross sections at the beginning and end of the profile.

See also Changing the profile of a part (67)

The profile catalog

Sketched cross sections (229)

Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile

Changing the material of a partWhen you create or modify a part, you can select the material and grade from a list that contains all the materials available in the material catalog.

To change the material of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click Select... next to the Material field.

The Select Material dialog box appears.

3. Optional: Define what material information you want to see.• To include aliases for material grades in the list, select the Show aliases check box.

• To see all the properties of materials, select the Show details check box.

4. Select a material from the list.5. Click OK to close the Select Material dialog box.6. Click Modify.

See also The material catalog

Alternatively, if you know the name of the material, you can enter it directly in the Material field in the part properties dialog box.

Page 69: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Steel partsCreating and modifying structures 69

Changing the color of a partYou can change the color of individual model objects by modifying their class in the part properties dialog box. Alternatively, you can use the object representation settings to specify colors for entire object groups.

To change the color of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. In the Class box, enter a new value.

The possible values range between 0 and 14.

3. Click Modify.

See also Color settings for parts (265)

Color settings for object groups (266)

Object representation settings (139)

5.3 Steel partsThis section explains how to create steel parts.

See also Creating a steel column (69)

Creating a steel beam (70)

Creating a steel polybeam (70)

Creating a curved beam (71)

Creating a contour plate (71)

Creating an orthogonal beam (72)

Creating a twin profile (73)

Creating a steel columnTo create a steel column:

1. Optional: Modify the steel column properties.2. Click the Create column icon.3. Pick the position of the column.

Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Column Properties dialog box.

You can also use the Mini Toolbar for changing the color.

Page 70: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Steel partsCreating and modifying structures 70

See also Steel column properties (267)

Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams (303)

Creating a steel beamTo create a steel beam:

1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.2. Click the Create beam icon.3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.

See also Steel beam properties (268)

Creating a steel polybeamA polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create bent plates with this command.

To create a steel polybeam:

1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.2. Click the Create polybeam icon.3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to correct the position of a column, if the upper and lower levels were switched when the column was copied and mirrored. Remember to change the part name to COLUMN.

Page 71: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Steel partsCreating and modifying structures 71

5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.

See also Polybeam chamfers (112)

Steel beam properties (268)

Polybeam length calculation

Creating a curved beamTo create a curved steel beam:

1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.2. Click the Create curved beam icon.3. Pick the starting point (1).4. Pick a point on the arc (2).5. Pick the end point (3).

See also Steel beam properties (268)

Creating curved parts (301)

Creating a contour plateWhen you create a contour plate, the profile you use defines the thickness of the plate and the picked points define the shape. The corners of the contour plate can be chamfered.

To create a contour plate:

1. Optional: Modify the contour plate properties.2. Click the Create contour plate icon.3. Pick the start point.4. Pick the corner points of the contour plate.5. Pick the start point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

Page 72: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Steel partsCreating and modifying structures 72

See also Creating a round contour plate (72)

Contour plate properties (269)

Creating a round contour plateTo create a round contour plate:

1. Create a square contour plate with four equal sides.2. Select the plate.3. Select the handles of the plate.

4. Press Alt + Enter to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.

5. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.6. Enter the chamfer radius in the x box.

The radius must be equal to half of the side of the square.

7. Click Modify.

See also Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (302)

Creating a contour plate (71)

Contour plate properties (269)

Chamfers (111)

Creating an orthogonal beamTo create a steel beam that is orthogonal to the work plane:

1. Optional: Modify the orthogonal beam properties.2. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Orthogonal Beam.3. Pick the position of the beam.

To select all the handles at once, hold down the Alt key and drag the mouse from left to right, covering all the handles.

Page 73: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 73

See also Orthogonal beam properties (270)

Creating a twin profileA twin profile consists of two identical beams. You define the positions of both beams by selecting the twin profile type and setting the clearance between the beams in two directions.

To create a twin steel profile:

1. Optional: Modify the twin profile properties.2. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Twin Profile.3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.

See also Twin profile properties (271)

5.4 AssembliesTekla Structures creates basic assemblies of steel parts when you use a workshop weld or bolt to join parts together. Assemblies and their main parts are automatically defined when you:

• Create single workshop welds or bolts.

• Apply automatic connections which create workshop welds or bolts.

You can also create nested assemblies by adding sub-assemblies to existing assemblies, or by joining assemblies together.

The main part in a steel assembly has other parts welded or bolted to it. By default, the main part is not welded or bolted to any other parts. You can change the main part in an assembly.

See also Creating an assembly (74)

Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Removing objects from an assembly (78)

Highlighting objects in an assembly (78)

Exploding an assembly (79)

Page 74: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 74

Assembly examples (79)

Selecting assemblies and cast units

Creating an assemblyTo create an assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.2. Select the parts and/or assemblies that you want to join together.3. Right-click and select Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (73)

Creating a sub-assembly (74)

Using bolts to create assemblies (74)

Using welds to create assemblies (75)

Creating a sub-assemblyTo create a sub-assembly of parts that are already in an assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.2. Select the parts you want to include in the sub-assembly.3. Right-click and select Make into Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Creating an assembly (74)

Using bolts to create assembliesYou can use bolts to create and connect assemblies. You can create nested assemblies by connecting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly, or you can just connect more parts to assemblies using bolts.

To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Bolt type list boxes in the Bolt Properties dialog box. The order in which you select parts when creating the connection determines the main and secondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy.

See also Assemblies (73)

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (74)

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assemblyTo bolt sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:

Connect part/assembly Bolt type Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site

Nested assembly with the assembly you are bolting as a sub-assembly.

The first part you pick determines the assembly to which you are bolting.

As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you are bolting as a secondary part.

The first part you pick usually becomes the main part in the assembly.

As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Page 75: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 75

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.3. Click Apply or OK.4. Select a part in the assembly to bolt to.5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be bolted.6. Pick the bolt group origin.7. Pick a point to indicate the bolt group x direction.

See also Using bolts to create assemblies (74)

Using welds to create assembliesTekla Structures forms assemblies based on where the weld should be made. You can create workshop welds and site welds.

The order in which you select parts when creating the connection determines the main and secondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy. The first part you select becomes the main part of the assembly. Tekla Structures dimensions secondary parts relative to the main part in assembly drawings. The largest main part in the weld becomes the main part of the assembly.

When you connect assemblies, the first part you select determines the assembly to which you weld sub-assemblies.

To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Workshop/Site list boxes in the Weld Properties dialog box.

See also Assemblies (73)

Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (75)

Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assemblyTo weld sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:

1. Double-click the Create weld between parts icon to open the Weld Properties dialog box.2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.3. Click Apply or OK.4. Select a part in the assembly to weld to.5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be welded.6. Optional: Create a drawing to check that the weld marks look correct.

See also Using welds to create assemblies (75)

Connect part/assembly Workshop/Site Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site

Nested assembly with the assembly you are welding as a sub-assembly.

The first part you pick determines the assembly to which you are welding.

As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you are welding as a secondary part.

The first part you pick usually becomes the main part in the assembly.

As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Page 76: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 76

Adding objects to assembliesYou can add objects to assemblies in the following ways:

See also Assemblies (73)

Assembly hierarchy (76)

Adding parts to an assembly (77)

Creating a nested assembly (77)

Joining assemblies (78)

Changing the assembly main part (78)

Changing the main assembly (78)

Assembly hierarchyYou can work on any level of a nested assembly, from single parts and bolts, through the basic and sub-assemblies, up to the highest level of the nested assembly.

To work with nested assemblies, you need to know how to use the Shift key and mouse scrolling to select objects on different levels in the assembly hierarchy.

To Do this

Create a basic assembly Do one of the following:

• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary parts.

• Bolt or weld parts to an existing assembly as secondary parts.

Create a nested assembly Do one of the following:

• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary parts.

• Bolt or weld assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-assemblies.

• Add assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-assemblies.

• Join existing assemblies together without adding any loose parts.

Sub-assemblies in a nested assembly retain their own assembly information and main part. You can also define properties separately for the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly by using the part properties dialog box.

Page 77: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 77

The assembly hierarchy in nested assemblies affects drawings and reports. You can create separate drawings and reports of the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly, and still produce dimensions, marks, fabrication information, etc. for all assembly levels.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Selecting nested assemblies and components

Adding parts to an assemblyTo add secondary parts to a basic assembly or to any level of a nested assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.2. Select the part you want to add.3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add to Assembly from the pop-up menu.4. Select the assembly to add to.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Creating a nested assemblyTo create a nested assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.2. Select the assemblies you want to add to another assembly. They will become sub-assemblies in

the nested assembly.3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly from the pop-up menu.4. Select the assembly to add to.

Page 78: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 78

See also Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Joining assembliesTo join existing assemblies without adding any loose parts:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.2. Select the assemblies you want to join.3. Right-click and select Assembly > Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.

The assembly with the largest volume becomes the main assembly.

See also Changing the main assembly (78)

Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Changing the assembly main partTo change the main part in an assembly:

1. Check what is currently the main part of the assembly.a Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.b Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.c Select the assembly.

Tekla Structures highlights the main part in orange color and the secondary part(s) in yellow color.

2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.3. Click Modeling > Assembly > Set as New Main Object of Assembly.4. Select the new main part.

Tekla Structures changes the main part.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Highlighting objects in an assembly (78)

Changing the main assemblyWhen you join two or more assemblies together, the assembly with the largest volume becomes the main assembly. You can change the main assembly at any time.

To change the main assembly in a nested assembly:

1. Select the new main assembly.2. Right-click and select Assembly > Set as New Main Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (76)

Removing objects from an assemblyTo remove objects from an assembly:

1. Select the part or sub-assembly you want to remove.2. Right-click and select Assembly > Remove from Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (73)

Highlighting objects in an assemblyUse the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular assembly.

To highlight objects in an assembly:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.

Page 79: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

AssembliesCreating and modifying structures 79

2. Select a part that belongs to an assembly.Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same assembly. The following colors are used:

See also Assemblies (73)

Exploding an assemblyWhen you explode a nested assembly, Tekla Structures breaks the assembly hierarchy level by level, always starting from the highest level. You need to use the Explode command several times to break a nested assembly back to single parts.

You can also explode sub-assemblies to single parts without breaking the entire assembly hierarchy.

To explode an assembly:

1. Select the assembly or sub-assembly you want to explode.2. Do one of the following:

• To explode the entire assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode from the pop-up menu.

• To only explode the sub-assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (73)

Assembly examples

Column corbel A column corbel is fabricated in one workshop, and then attached to the column in another workshop. Model the corbel as a sub-assembly of the column. Then create an assembly drawing for each workshop: one assembly drawing showing how the corbel is welded together, another assembly drawing showing how the corbel and the other part are welded to the column.

Object type Highlight color

Concrete - main part magenta

Concrete - secondary part cyan

Reinforcement blue

Steel part - main part orange

Steel part - secondary part yellow

Page 80: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Concrete partsCreating and modifying structures 80

Complex truss Model the halves of a complex truss as assemblies. Create assembly drawings for the workshop to fabricate the truss halves. Then create another assembly drawing showing how the halves should be joined on site.

Built-up profile In a frame of built-up columns and beams, each built-up profile can be a sub-assembly. You can create an assembly drawing showing the entire frame, and separate drawings showing how the columns and beams are constructed.

See also Assemblies (73)

Assembly drawings

5.5 Concrete partsThis section explains how to create concrete parts.

See also Creating a pad footing (81)

Creating a strip footing (81)

Creating a concrete column (81)

Creating a concrete beam (82)

Drawing 2, Workshop 2

Drawing 1, Workshop 1

Page 81: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Concrete partsCreating and modifying structures 81

Creating a concrete polybeam (82)

Creating a concrete slab (83)

Creating a concrete panel (84)

Creating a pad footingTo create a pad footing:

1. Optional: Modify the pad footing properties.2. Click the Create pad footing icon.3. Pick the pad footing position.

See also Pad footing properties (272)

Creating a strip footingTo create a strip footing:

1. Optional: Modify the strip footing properties.2. Click the Create strip footing icon.3. Pick the points you want the footing to go through.4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the footing.

See also Strip footing properties (272)

Creating a concrete columnTo create a concrete column:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete column properties.2. Click the Create concrete column icon.3. Pick the position of the column.

Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Concrete Column Properties dialog box.

Page 82: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Concrete partsCreating and modifying structures 82

See also Concrete column properties (273)

Creating a concrete beamTo create a concrete beam:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.2. Click the Create concrete beam icon.3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.

See also Concrete beam properties (274)

Creating a concrete polybeamA polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create concrete bent plates with this command.

To create a concrete polybeam:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.2. Click the Create concrete polybeam icon.3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.

Page 83: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Concrete partsCreating and modifying structures 83

See also Polybeam chamfers (112)

Concrete beam properties (274)

Polybeam length calculation

Creating a concrete slabWhen you create a concrete slab, the profile you use defines the thickness of the slab and the picked points define the shape. The corners of the slab can be chamfered.

To create a concrete slab:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete slab properties.2. Click the Create concrete slab icon.3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the corner points of the slab.5. Pick the starting point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

See also Creating a round slab (83)

Concrete slab properties (275)

Creating a round slabTo create a round slab:

1. Create a square slab with four equal sides.2. Select the slab.3. Select the handles of the slab.

4. Press Alt + Enter to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.

5. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.6. Enter the chamfer radius in the x box.

The radius must be equal to half of the side of the square.

To select all the handles at once, hold down the Alt key and drag the mouse from left to right, covering all the handles.

Page 84: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 84

7. Click Modify.

See also Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (302)

Creating a concrete slab (83)

Concrete slab properties (275)

Chamfers (111)

Creating a concrete panelTo create a concrete panel:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete panel properties.2. Click the Create concrete panel icon.3. Pick the points you want the panel to go through.4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the panel.

See also Concrete panel properties (276)

Chamfers (111)

5.6 Cast unitsThe concrete structures in Tekla Structures are modeled as single parts. By default, each part is considered a separate cast unit. For construction purposes you may need to merge several concrete parts into one cast unit. For example, a single cast unit could consist of a column with corbels.

You need to specify which parts form the cast unit. Cast units can include reinforcement, as well as concrete parts.

The main part in a concrete cast unit is the one with the largest volume of concrete. You can change the main part in a cast unit.

Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in place or Precast:

Page 85: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 85

See also Creating a cast unit (85)

Adding objects to cast units (85)

Removing objects from a cast unit (86)

Highlighting objects in a cast unit (86)

Exploding a cast unit (87)

Defining the cast unit type (87)

Casting direction (87)

Creating a cast unitTo create a cast unit:

1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Create.2. Select the objects you want to include in the cast unit.3. Click the middle mouse button to create the cast unit.

See also Cast units (84)

Adding objects to cast unitsThis section explains how to add objects to a cast unit.

See also Cast units (84)

Adding concrete objects to a cast unit (85)

Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit (86)

Changing the cast unit main part (86)

Adding concrete objects to a cast unitTo add concrete objects to a cast unit:

1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Add to.2. Select the objects you want to add.3. Select an object in the cast unit.

See also Adding objects to cast units (85)

Cast unit type Description

Precast Cast units that are built at another location and transported to their final location for placement in the full structure.

Cast in place Cast units that are constructed fully in their final location.

It is important to use the correct cast unit type, because some functionalities, for example numbering, are based on the cast unit type.

Page 86: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 86

Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unitUse the Add as Sub-Assembly command when adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit. This applies to anything that is not concrete, such as steel parts and insulation.

To add a non-concrete part to a cast unit:

1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is active.2. Click Modeling > Assembly > Add as Sub-Assembly.3. Select the non-concrete part you want to add.4. Select the cast unit to which you want to add the part.

See also Adding objects to cast units (85)

Changing the cast unit main partTo change the main part in a cast unit:

1. Check what is currently the main part of the cast unit.a Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.b Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.c Select the cast unit.

Tekla Structures highlights the main and secondary parts in different colors.

2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.3. Select the new main part.4. Right-click and select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Adding objects to cast units (85)

Highlighting objects in a cast unit (86)

Removing objects from a cast unitTo remove objects from a cast unit:

1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Remove From.2. Select the objects you want to remove.

See also Cast units (84)

Highlighting objects in a cast unitUse the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular cast unit.

To highlight objects in a cast unit:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.2. Select a part that belongs to a cast unit.

Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same cast unit. The following colors are used:

Object type Highlight color

Concrete - main part magenta

Concrete - secondary part cyan

Reinforcement blue

Steel part - main part orange

Page 87: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 87

See also Cast units (84)

Exploding a cast unitTo explode a cast unit:

1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Explode.2. Select an object in the cast unit you want to explode.

See also Cast units (84)

Defining the cast unit typeTekla Structures checks the cast unit type of the main part each time you create or modify a cast unit. Tekla Structures does not mix precast and cast-in-place parts within a cast unit.

To define whether a concrete part is precast or cast in place:

1. Double-click a concrete part to open the concrete part properties dialog box.2. Go to the Cast unit tab.3. In the Cast unit type list box, select Precast or Cast in place.4. Click Modify to save the changes.

See also Cast units (84)

Casting directionTo indicate the casting direction of a concrete part, you can define which part face you want to have on top of the casting form. The top-in-form face is displayed in the front view of a drawing.

The casting direction affects the numbering of concrete parts. If you define the casting direction for parts that differ only by their modeling direction, they get different position numbers. This is because the modeling direction affects the top-in-form face of the parts. By default, the casting direction of the parts is undefined, which means the modeling direction does not affect numbering.

Example In the following example, each cast unit gets a different position number, because the top-in-form setting and the orientation of the panels is different. The red arrow indicates the modeling direction.

Steel part - secondary part yellow

Object type Highlight color

In drawings, use the Fixed coordinate system to show the top-in-form face in the front view.

Page 88: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 88

In the following example, the cast units get the same position number, because their top-in-form setting has not been defined. The red arrow indicates the modeling direction.

See also Cast units (84)

Defining the casting direction of a part (88)

Numbering the model (169)

Defining the casting direction of a partTo define the casting direction of a concrete part:

1. Set the representation of parts to Rendered by doing one of the following:• Click View > Representation > Parts > Rendered.

• Press Ctrl + 4.

2. Select a concrete part.3. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Set Top in Form Face.4. Select the part face that will face upwards in the form.

See also Casting direction (87)

Page 89: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 89

Showing the top-in-form faceTo display the top-in-form face of a concrete part:

1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Show Top in Form Face.2. Click the concrete part whose top-in-form face you want to show.

Tekla Structures highlights the top-in-form face in red:

See also Casting direction (87)

To hide the top-in-form face again, right-click the view and select Update Window from the pop-up menu.

Page 90: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Cast unitsCreating and modifying structures 90

Page 91: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

BoltsDetailing structures 91

6 Detailing structures

This section explains how to create details using Tekla Structures. It also gives you some techniques for fine-tuning part shapes.

Contents • Bolts (91)

• Holes (94)

• Welds (97)• Surface treatment (101)

• Fine-tuning part shape (110)

• Combining parts (121)• Splitting parts (123)

6.1 BoltsTo create bolts, you can either create a single bolt group or apply a component that automatically creates bolt groups.

For more information on using components to automatically create bolt groups, see Defining bolts and welds in the Detailing Guide.

You can create different part marks for holes and bolts in drawings.

Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Therefore you cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes.

See also Creating a bolt group (92)

Page 92: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

BoltsDetailing structures 92

Creating a single bolt (94)

Changing or adding bolted parts (94)

The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs

Creating a bolt groupTo create a bolt group:

1. Optional: Modify the bolt properties.2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Create Bolts.3. Select the main part, to which the secondary parts will be bolted.4. Select the secondary parts.5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.6. Pick a point, which is the bolt group origin.7. Pick a second point to indicate the bolt group x direction.

See also Bolts (91)

Bolt properties (285)

Bolt group shape (92)

Bolt group position (93)

Bolt offsets (93)

Bolt group shapeYou have the following options for bolt group shape:

• Array for rectangular

• Circle for circular

• xy list for any shape

Tekla Structures uses the values of the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields to determine how many bolts the bolt group contains, as shown in the table below:

You can also create a new bolt group by modifying an existing one. In most cases it is easier to create bolt groups by applying a component that includes bolt groups.

To create new bolts by modifying an existing bolt group:

1. Apply a component.2. Explode the component.3. Modify the bolt group.

Shape Bolt dist X Bolt dist Y

Array Spacing between bolts, in the x direction of the bolt group.

Spacing between bolts, in the y direction of the bolt group.

Circle Number of bolts. Diameter of the bolt group.

xy list x coordinate of each bolt, from the bolt group point of origin.

y coordinate of each bolt, from the bolt group point of origin.

Page 93: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

BoltsDetailing structures 93

Examples

See also Creating a bolt group (92)

Bolt group positionTekla Structures determines the location of the bolt group using the following values:

• Bolt group x axis

• Work plane

Dimensions are relative to the bolt group origin, which is the first point you pick when creating a bolt group. Tekla Structures sets the x direction of a bolt group using the second point picked.

It is important that the points you pick to create the bolt group are close enough to the parts you want to connect.

See also Creating a bolt group (92)

Bolt offsetsYou can use offsets to change the position of the bolt group. Offsets move the bolt group by moving the x axis of the bolt group.

Bolt group shape Dimensions Picture

Array Bolt dist X: 150

Bolt dist Y: 100

Circle Number of bolts: 6

Diameter: 100

xy list Bolt dist X: 75 175 250

Bolt dist Y: 75 -50 0

Page 94: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

HolesDetailing structures 94

The starting point values Dx, Dy and Dz move the first end of the bolt group, relative to the bolt group x axis. The end point values move the second end of the bolt group.

• A positive Dx value moves the starting point towards the end point.

• Dy moves the end point perpendicular to the bolt group x axis on the current work plane.• Dz moves the end point perpendicular to the current work plane.

Example An example bolt group with the Dx starting point set to 75:

See also Creating a bolt group (92)

Creating a single boltTo create a single bolt:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.2. Under Bolt group, select Array from the Shape list box.3. In the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields, type 0.4. Click Apply to save the changes.5. Create the bolt the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the

status bar.

See also Bolts (91)

Bolt properties (285)

Creating a bolt group (92)

Changing or adding bolted partsTo change the parts a bolt group connects to:

1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Edit Bolted Parts.2. When prompted, reselect the main and secondary parts.

Tekla Structures automatically updates bolt length to suit these changes.

See also Bolts (91)

6.2 HolesTekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Before creating holes, you need to change some of the properties in the Bolt Properties dialog box.

Page 95: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

HolesDetailing structures 95

If you want to create only holes without any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes:

You can create the following types of holes:

• Round

• Oversized• Slotted

• Tapped

See also Creating round holes (95)

Creating oversized holes (96)

Creating slotted holes (95)

Creating round holesTekla Structures calculates the diameter of a round hole as the sum of Bolt size and Tolerance.

To create round holes:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.2. Optional: Modify the hole properties.3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.4. Click Apply to save the changes.5. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the

status bar.

See also Holes (94)

Creating a bolt group (92)

Creating slotted holesTo create slotted holes:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.2. To indicate which parts should be slotted, select the desired Parts with slotted holes check

boxes.Tekla Structures counts the pieces of steel from the head of the bolt down. For example, if you select the second check box from the head of the bolt, Tekla Structures slots the second piece of steel from the head of the bolt.

3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.4. In the Hole type list box, select Slotted.5. Enter the allowance for the slotted hole in the x and y directions of the hole group using the

Slotted hole X or Slotted hole Y fields.

Page 96: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

HolesDetailing structures 96

6. Optional: In the Rotate slots list box, select Even or Odd to rotate alternate holes by 90 degrees.

7. Click Apply to save the changes.8. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the

status bar.

See also Holes (94)

Creating a bolt group (92)

Creating oversized holesTo create oversized holes:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.2. Select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes to indicate which plies of the

connection get oversized holes.3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.4. In the Hole type list box, select Oversized.5. In the Oversize field, enter the allowance for the oversized hole.

You can also use a negative value to create smaller (tapped) holes.

6. Click Apply to save the changes.

Tolerance

Slotted hole X or Y

Bolt size

Crossing slotted holes to odd or even parts

Parallel slotted holes

Page 97: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

WeldsDetailing structures 97

7. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the status bar.

See also Holes (94)

Creating a bolt group (92)

6.3 WeldsYou can either create a weld manually, or use a component that automatically creates welds.

The following types of welds can be created manually:

• Weld between partsTekla Structures welds two parts together using the weld position defined in the Weld Properties dialog box. The length of the weld depends on the length of the connection between the welded parts.

• Polygon weldYou define the exact position of the weld by picking the points you want the weld to traverse.

• Single-part weld

Tekla Structures creates a weld to a single part, without connecting any other parts.

See also Creating a weld between parts (97)

Creating a polygon weld (99)

Creating a weld to a part (100)

Weld preparation (100)

Weld properties (287)

XS_AISC_WELD_MARK

Creating a weld between partsTo weld parts together:

1. Optional: Modify the weld properties.2. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld between Parts.3. Select the part to weld to.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.

4. Select the part to be welded.If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.

To display the weld object in the model in both Fast and Exact mode, remember to give the weld Size and Type in weld properties.

By default Tekla Structures places the welds above line according to the ISO standard. You can change this to below line to comply with the AISC standard with the advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK.

Page 98: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

WeldsDetailing structures 98

See also Welds (97)

Weld properties (287)

Weld position (98)

Weld size prefixes (99)

Using welds to create assemblies (75)

Weld positionYou define the position of a weld relative to the work plane. The type and position of the parts to be welded affect the position of the weld.

The options for weld position are:

• x• y• z

These can all be in a positive or negative direction. Tekla Structures creates the weld on the face or side of the part that faces in the selected direction (x, y, or z).

Example The following image shows welds in different positions. If there are no faces that touch in the specified direction, Tekla Structures places the weld relative to the center point of the secondary part.

Main part

Secondary part

Page 99: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

WeldsDetailing structures 99

See also Creating a weld between parts (97)

Weld size prefixesThe weld size prefix is shown in drawings, but only if the Size checkbox is also selected.

The following table describes the standard ISO 2553 prefixes:

See also Creating a weld between parts (97)

Creating a polygon weldTo weld parts together using a polygon:

1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Polygon Weld.2. Select the part to weld to.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.

3. Select the part to be welded.If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.

4. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to go through.

5. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.

Prefix Description

a Design throat thickness

s Penetration throat thickness

z Leg length

Page 100: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

WeldsDetailing structures 100

See also Welds (97)

Using welds to create assemblies (75)

Creating a weld to a partTo create a weld to a part, without connecting any other parts:

1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld to Part.2. Select the part that you want to weld.3. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to go

through.4. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.

Example Use the Create Weld to Part command to weld seams in tubular sections:

See also Welds (97)

Weld preparationWhen parts are prepared for welding, their edges can be beveled to produce a groove for the weld. You can define the angle of bevels and grooves.

You can either prepare a part for welding manually, or apply a component that does it automatically.

To model tubular sections with visible seams, use the SPD profile.

Page 101: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 101

See also Welds (97)

Manually preparing a part for welding (101)

Welded connections

Manually preparing a part for weldingBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.

To manually prepare a part to be welded:

1. Click Detailing > Weld > Prepare Part for Welding.2. Select the part that you want to cut.3. Select the cutting part.

See also Weld preparation (100)

6.4 Surface treatmentUse the surface treatment tools to add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for concrete parts include flat finishes, surface mixes, and tiles. Surface treatment for steel parts include fire-proofing and unpainted areas, for example. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered views.

When you redefine the properties of a part (e.g. you change the size of a part), Tekla Structures automatically modifies the surface treatment to fit the part.

To prevent automatic weld preparation, set the variable XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID to TRUE in your environment initialization file.

The part to be cut

The cutting part

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Page 102: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 102

When you create overlapping surface treatments, the smaller surface treatment overrides the larger one. The overlapping area is recognized in reports: only the topmost (visible) surface treatment is calculated.

See also Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Creating new surface treatment options (105)

Tiled surface treatment (106)

Modifying surface treatment propertiesTo define the properties of a surface treatment:

1. Click Detailing > Properties > Surface Treatment... to open the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

2. In the Type list box, select the type of surface treatment to use.3. In the Surface treatment name list box, select the specific surface treatment.4. Click the Select... to select a material from the catalog.5. Enter the Thickness of the surface treatment.6. Set the Color to use to display the surface treatment in rendered views.7. In the At depth list box, select the location of the surface treatment. The options are Middle,

Front, and Behind.8. Optional: To define the properties of a tiled surface treatment:

a On the Attributes tab, select Tile surface from the Type list box.b On the Pattern tab, select the pattern from the Pattern type list box.c The Definition table lists the properties of the pattern type.

9. Click Apply or OK to save the surface treatment properties.

See also Surface treatment (101)

Page 103: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 103

Adding surface treatment to partsThis section explains how to add surface treatment to a part.

See also Surface treatment (101)

Adding surface treatment to a selected area (103)

Adding surface treatment to a part face (103)

Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part (103)

Adding surface treatment to cut faces (103)

Surface treatment on chamfered parts (104)

Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses (104)

Adding surface treatment to a selected areaTo add surface treatment to a selected area on the face of a part:

1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Selected Area on Part Face.2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.4. Select an area of the part face to apply the surface treatment to.

a Move the mouse pointer over a part. The part faces that you can select appear in blue.b Select the part face.c Pick three or more points on the part face to define a polygonal area.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Adding surface treatment to a part faceTo add surface treatment to the entire face of a part:

1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Part Face.2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.4. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.

a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.b Select the part face.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Adding surface treatment to all faces of a partTo add surface treatment to all faces of a part:

1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To All Faces of Part.2. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Adding surface treatment to cut facesTo add surface treatment to cut faces:

1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment, and then select either To Part Face or To Selected Area on Part Face.

Page 104: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 104

2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.3. Pick the direction.4. Select the cut face to apply the surface treatment to:

5. If you are using the To Selected Area on Part Face command, pick the points to define the area of the surface treatment.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Surface treatment on chamfered partsTake these things into account when adding surface treatment to chamfered parts:

• Surface treatment does not work on sketched profiles with chamfers.• Add surface treatment before chamfering the part. If surface treatment is applied to a

chamfered part, the surface treatment chamfer cannot be modified later on.• The chamfers for the main part and surface treatment are separate. Modifying the main part

chamfer does not affect the surface treatment chamfer.• The orientation of unsymmetric chamfers depends on the face where it was created (such as

top, bottom, left, or right). To change the orientation of an unsymmetric chamfer, you must swap the chamfer's x and y values.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Surface treatment on parts with openings and recessesTo force Tekla Structures to consider openings and recesses in parts when adding surface treatment, select the Cut by father part cuts checkbox in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

Page 105: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 105

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (103)

Modifying surface treatment properties (102)

Creating new surface treatment options

You can add new options to the Surface treatment name list box in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

To create new surface treatment options:

1. Open the product_finishes.dat file using any text editor.The file is located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.

The first section of the file defines the available types of surface treatment. Do not edit this section:

The green surface treatment has the Cut by father part cuts check box selected

The tiled surface treatment is not cut by the cut in the part: Cut by father part cuts is not selected.

If you use the To All Faces of Part command and select the Cut by father part cuts checkbox, Tekla Structures automatically adds surface treatment also to the cut faces.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 106: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 106

2. Go to the sections that define the options for each type of surface treatment:

3. Add rows to define new options.a Define the surface treatment type. For example, 1 for concrete finish.b Define a code for the surface treatment option. For example, MF for Magnesium Float.c Define the full name of the surface treatment option. For example, Magnesium Float.

Remember to enclose the name in double quotes " ".4. Save the file.

See also Surface treatment (101)

Tiled surface treatment

Tekla Structures includes complex tile and brick surface treatment options, such as basketweave and herringbone patterns. Tiled surface treatment options are based on repeating tile patterns that are stored in XML format.

See also Surface treatment (101)

Creating new tile patterns (106)

Example pattern definition (107)

Creating new tile patternsTo create new tile patterns:

1. Open the TilePatternCatalog.xml file using any text editor.The file is located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.

2. Add a new <TilePattern> element to the file.

// Product finishes// -------------------------//// Type : Type of surfacing// 1 = concrete finish// 2 = special mix// 3 = tile surface// 4 = steel finishes

// =========================================// *** Concrete Finish// =========================================// WET FINISH// ----------1 MF "Magnesium Float"1 SMF "Smooth Magnesium Float"1 WT "Wet Trowel"

This section is for advanced users.

Page 107: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 107

The <TilePattern> element must have <HOffset> and <VOffset> elements and at least one <Tile> element. Other elements are optional.

3. Repeat adding <TilePattern> elements for all the patterns you want to define.4. Save the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

See also Tiled surface treatment (106)

Example pattern definition (107)

Tile pattern definitions (109)

Tile pattern elements (110)

Example pattern definitionThis example explains how the Basketweave tile pattern is defined in the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

The Basketweave pattern block is made up of eight tiles:

You may find it easier to copy one of the existing elements, and then modify it to suit your needs.

Tile width

Mortar width

VOffset

HOffset

Page 108: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 108

The pattern is repeated in the x and y direction of the surface treatment, starting from the origin of the surface treatment. You can run the pattern in different x directions:

In the TilePatternCatalog.xml file, the pattern is defined as follows:

Red marks indicate TileOrigin. Angle value for vertical tiles is 90

Tile height

Mortar height

Page 109: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Surface treatmentDetailing structures 109

The definition file uses the same symbols as the pattern definition table in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box:

See also Creating new tile patterns (106)

Tile pattern definitions (109)

Tile pattern elements (110)

Tile pattern definitionsThe predefined tile patterns that are available in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box are stored in the following files:

The name of the pattern

The size of the pattern block in the x direction, after which the pattern repeats

The size of the pattern block in the y direction, after which the pattern repeats

File Description

TilePatternCatalog.xml • Contains the tile pattern definitions.• Located in the ..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.

TilePatternCatalog.dtd • Document Type Declaration (DTD) file that defines the elements allowed in the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

• Located in the same folder as the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

Page 110: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 110

See also Tiled surface treatment (106)

Tile pattern elementsThe TilePatternCatalog.xml file can contain the following elements:

See also Tiled surface treatment (106)

6.5 Fine-tuning part shapeThis section describes the various tools you can use to fine-tune the shape of a part.

See also Chamfers (111)

Fittings (114)

Cuts (115)

Modifying the shape of a polygon (118)

Warping concrete parts (119)

Cambering parts (121)

Thumbnail images • The images that appear in the Picture field in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

• Located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.

• Filenames identify the pattern types. For example, herringbone.bmp illustrates the herringbone pattern type.

File Description

Element Description

TilePatternCatalog The container for tile patterns. Required.

TilePattern Tile pattern element. Required. This element can contain the following elements listed in this table.

HOffset Horizontal offset of the tile pattern. Required.

VOffset Vertical offset of the tile pattern. Required.

Tile The individual tiles used in a tile pattern. At least one required.

Color Color of the tile or mortar, defined by the RGB values (0–255). Optional.

Parameter Creates an attribute for any element in the TilePattern. Optional.

Label The label that identifies a parameter in the dialog box. Optional.

TileOrigin The origin of an individual tile, defined from the origin of the pattern. Optional.

Page 111: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 111

Combining parts (121)

Splitting parts (123)

Shortening and lengthening parts

ChamfersChamfers are modeling details that can be used to refine the shape of parts for aesthetic, practical, and manufacturing reasons. In Tekla Structures, you can chamfer part corners and part edges.

Limitations Only the following parts have corner chamfers: contour plates, concrete slabs, and parts that you create by picking more than two points (strip footings, steel and concrete polybeams, and concrete panels).

The end points of a part do not have corner chamfers. The handles that you select must be at corner points or between two segments of a part.

See also Fine-tuning part shape (110)

Chamfering part corners (111)

Chamfering part edges (113)

Chamfering part cornersWhen Tekla Structures creates a part, by default it has a rectangular chamfer at each corner, which does not change the geometry of the part. You can modify the default chamfers.

To modify a corner chamfer:

1. Select the part.2. Double-click the handle of any part corner.

The Chamfer Properties dialog box is displayed.

3. Modify the chamfer properties.4. Select the handles of the part corners you want to modify.5. Click Modify.

See also Chamfers (111)

Corner chamfer properties (291)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (112)

Page 112: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 112

Polybeam chamfers (112)

Corner chamfer types and dimensionsStraight chamfers can have different dimensions in two directions. Tekla Structures only uses one dimension for curved chamfers.

The coordinates follow the part’s local coordinate system.

The table below describes the chamfer types and dimensions used with the Create Chamfer > For Part Corner command.

See also Chamfering part corners (111)

Polybeam chamfersBy default, Tekla Structures places a rectangular corner chamfer between each polybeam segment. You can modify the default chamfers.

Type Icon Dimensions

None x: not used

y: not used

Line x:the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from the corner

Rounding x: the radius

y: not used

Arc x: the radius

y: not used

Arc point x: not used

y: not used

Square The chamfer is perpendicular to the edges.

x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from the corner

Square parallel

The chamfer is parallel to the opposite edge.

x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from the corner

Line and arc

x (if smaller than y): the arc radius

x (if bigger than y): the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner

y (if smaller than x): the arc radius

y (if bigger than x): the distance in the y coordinate direction from the corner

Page 113: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 113

Tekla Structures shows the status of polybeam chamfers using the following colors:

See also Chamfering part corners (111)

Chamfering part edgesTo chamfer the edge of a part:

1. Click Detailing > Create Chamfer > For Part Edge.2. Select the part you want to chamfer.3. Pick a point where you want the chamfer to start on the part edge.4. Pick a second point where you want the chamfer to end on the part edge.

Tekla Structures displays the chamfer in light blue color.

5. Optional: Modify the chamfer.

Color Description Example

Magenta Correct chamfer

Yellow Correct chamfer that cannot be unfolded

Red Incorrect chamfer

To see the chamfer lines of polybeams, set the advanced option XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS.

Page 114: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 114

a Double-click the chamfer to open the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box.b Modify the chamfer properties.c Click OK.

6. Right-click the view and select Redraw View.Tekla Structures removes the chamfered edge.

See also Edge chamfer properties (291)

Chamfers (111)

FittingsYou can fit the end of a part to a plane by creating a straight cutting line between two points you pick.

You can use fittings to extend or shorten parts inside a component, which makes it easier to create connections, details, and so on. Do not use fittings to otherwise change the length of a part in the model.

A fitting adjusts the end of a beam on a plane, perpendicular to the view plane, which passes through the cutting line you pick. Fittings cannot be used on contour plates.

See also Fine-tuning part shape (110)

Creating a fitting (114)

Creating a fittingTo create a fitting:

1. Click Detailing > Fit Part End.2. Select the part you want to cut with a fitting.3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.

Fitting symbol

Page 115: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 115

See also Fittings (114)

CutsYou can use cuts to shape a part. Do not use cuts for cutting the entire part end.

See also Cutting parts with a line (117)

Cutting parts with a polygon (117)

Cutting parts with another part (118)

Hiding cut lines in a view (298)

Cutting efficiently (298)

Line cutsA line cut cuts the end of a beam on a plane that passes through the line you pick. Tekla Structures displays the cut line using dash-and-dot lines.

By default, line cuts do not affect beam length in NC files. For more information on how to change this, see Fittings affect NC data.

See also Cutting parts with a line (117)

Do not apply a second fitting on the same part end, because then Tekla Structures will ignore the first fitting. This happens if you use the Fit Part End command for cutting and try to make two cuts on the same part end. In situations like this, use the Cut Part commands instead.

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Cut lines are hidden

Page 116: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 116

Polygon cutsA polygon cut cuts a part using a polygonal shape. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-dot lines. You must create cuts in a plane view.

See also Cutting parts with a polygon (117)

Part cutsYou can cut a part using another part. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-dot lines.

You can cut parts that already have cuts. This can be useful, for example, when you want to create more sophisticated cut shapes.

Polygon-shaped cut

Cut lines are hidden

You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerance between the edges. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the same position as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether the edge should be cut away.

Page 117: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 117

See also Cutting parts with another part (118)

Cutting parts with a lineUse line cuts to shape the end of a beam or column.

To cut a part with a line:

1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Line.2. Select the part you want to cut.3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.5. Pick the side you want to remove.

See also Cuts (115)

Line cuts (115)

Cutting parts with a polygonTo cut a part using a polygonal shape:

1. Ensure that the work plane is on the plane you are cutting on.For example, if you are creating a polygonal cut on the yz plane, you should temporarily set your work plane to the yz plane as well.

2. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Polygon.3. Select the part you want to cut.4. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for cutting.5. To close the polygon, click the middle mouse button or click Edit > Finish Polygon Input.

See also Cuts (115)

Polygon cuts (116)

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Cut lines are hidden

Do not create cuts with the same planes or vertices. This makes it unclear what should be cut away.

Page 118: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 118

Cutting parts with another partBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.

To cut a part with another part:

1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Another Part.2. Select the part you want to cut.3. Select the cutting part.

Tekla Structures cuts the selected main part. The part cut does not affect other parts.

4. Delete the cutting part.a Ensure that the Select cuts and fittings selection switch is off.b Select the cutting part and press Delete.

See also Cuts (115)

Part cuts (116)

Modifying the shape of a polygonYou can modify the shape of the following polygonal parts: steel and concrete polybeams, contour plates, concrete slabs, concrete panels, and strip footings.

To modify the shape of a polygonal part:

1. Select the part you want to modify.2. Click Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.3. Pick an existing corner (1).4. Pick new corners for the polygon (2, 3).5. Pick another existing corner (4).6. Pick the corner to remove (5).

See also Moving an object

Moving an object using drag-and-drop

Alternatively, move the handles using drag-and-drop or the Move command.

Page 119: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 119

Part handles (61)

Warping concrete partsUse the following methods to warp concrete parts:

See also Fine-tuning part shape (110)

Warping a concrete beam using deformation angles (119)

Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers (119)

Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab (120)

Warping a concrete beam using deformation anglesTo warp a concrete beam:

1. Double-click a concrete beam to open the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box.2. Go to the Deforming tab.3. In the Start field, enter the angle of the beam at its start point, relative to the part handles.4. In the End field, enter the angle of the beam at its end point, relative to the part handles.

For example, to warp the beam 45 degrees at the end point, type 0 in the Start angle field and 45 in the End angle field.

5. Click Modify to warp the beam. 6. Click OK to close the dialog box.

See also Warping concrete parts (119)

Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfersBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Create concrete slab command.

To Do this

Warp a concrete beam Use the deforming options in the part properties dialog box.

Warp a concrete slab Move the chamfers.

The warping functionality is available only in the Full, Precast Concrete Detailing, and Steel Detailing configurations.

Page 120: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Fine-tuning part shapeDetailing structures 120

To warp a concrete slab by moving the chamfers:

1. Double-click a chamfer to open the Chamfer Properties dialog box.2. Modify the chamfer properties.

• To move the upper corner of the chamfer, use the dz1 field.

• To move the lower corner of the chamfer, use the dz2 field.

3. Click Modify to warp the slab.4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

See also Warping concrete parts (119)

Warping a Floor Bay (66) slabBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.

To warp a Floor Bay (66) slab by moving chamfers:

1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is on.2. Select the chamfer you want to move.

For example, select the corner point of a slab component to warp that end of the slab:

3. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear from the pop-up menu.4. In the Move - Linear dialog box, type a value in the appropriate direction field.

For example, type 100 in the dZ field to lift that corner up 100 mm.

5. Click Move.Tekla Structures moves the point in the direction you selected, which warps the slabs.

Page 121: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Combining partsDetailing structures 121

6. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to finish.7. Ensure that the Select objects in components selection switch is on.8. To see the warping angle of a single slab, double-click a slab to open the Beam properties

dialog box, and go to the Deforming tab.• The Start field shows the warping angle at the start point of the part.

• The End field shows the warping angle at the end point of the part.

See also Warping concrete parts (119)

Cambering partsYou can use cambering to pre-camber parts, in other words, to curve long heavy sections that will settle on site and become flat.

Use cambering to show the natural camber of a prestressed part in a model. Cambering affects the position of cuts, skews, and embeds in the model.

Tekla Structures cambers parts in the local z direction.

See also Fine-tuning part shape (110)

Cambering a part (121)

Cambering a partTo camber a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Go to the Deforming tab.3. In the Cambering box, define the degree of camber. 4. Click Modify.

See also Cambering parts (121)

6.6 Combining partsYou can combine existing parts in Tekla Structures. This can be useful when you want to model complex parts (such as folded plates) that are otherwise difficult to model, or when you want to model prefabricated parts that are delivered to the workshop already attached to profiles.

When you select the parts you want to combine, the part properties of the part that is selected first are used for the combined part.

The cambering functionality is available only in the Full, Precast Concrete Detailing and Cast in Place configurations.

Page 122: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Combining partsDetailing structures 122

You can add the new combined part to another combined part. Cuts and fittings can also be applied to combined parts.

See also Combining two parts into one (122)

Attaching a part to another part (122)

Combining two parts into oneTo combine two parts into one:

1. Click Edit > Combine.2. Select the first part.3. Select the second part.If the centerlines of the part are not in line with each other, the centerlines are combined by taking the largest distance between the start and end points from both parts.

See also Combining parts (121)

Attaching a part to another partTo attach a part to another part:

1. Click Detailing > Attach Part.2. Select the part to attach to.3. Select the part you want to attach.

Limitations The attachment process cannot be reversed. Once the part has been attached to another part, it cannot be detached from it.

Combining does not work for contour plates or polybeams.

When you combine parts, Tekla Structures retains the attached objects and connections. Tekla Structures does not recreate connections in the part that was selected first.

Page 123: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Splitting partsDetailing structures 123

See also Combining parts (121)

6.7 Splitting partsYou can split a part into two parts in Tekla Structures.

You can use splitting with straight parts, curved beams without offsets, or normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups. You can also split plates and slabs by using a polygon. You cannot split polybeams.

See also Splitting a straight or curved part (123)

Splitting a plate or slab (123)

Splitting a straight or curved partTo split a straight or curved part:

1. Click Edit > Split.2. Select the part you want to split.3. Pick a point for the dividing line.

See also Splitting parts (123)

Splitting a plate or slabTo split a plate or slab by using a polygon:

1. Click Edit > Split.2. Select the part you want to split.3. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for splitting.4. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon and to split the part.

See also Splitting parts (123)

When you pick the corner points of the polygon to be used for splitting, make sure the starting and end points are:

• outside of the part, and

• on the same side of the part.

If you split contour plates that have bolts, welds or surface treatments, check the result after splitting.

Page 124: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Splitting partsDetailing structures 124

Page 125: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 125

7 Examining the model

This section describes a variety of tools you can use to view the model and control the visibility of objects in the model.

Contents • Viewing the model (125)

• Showing and hiding objects (131)

• Visualizing project status (143)

7.1 Viewing the modelTo see your Tekla Structures model from virtually any angle, you can move and rotate the model.

See also Zooming the model (125)

Rotating the model (126)

Moving the model (127)

Flying through the model (128)

Creating a clip plane (129)

Creating a screenshot (129)

Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model (131)

Zooming the modelThe commands on the View > Zoom menu allow you to focus in on a particular area, or pull out for a wider view. You can use a mouse, keyboard shortcuts, or a combination of both.

To zoom in or out in a model:

• Scroll with the mouse wheel.

Scroll forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.

See also Viewing the model (125)

Modifying the zoom settings (126)

If you do not have a wheel mouse, use the commands on the View > Zoom menu to zoom in or out in the model. For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

Page 126: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 126

Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (126)

Modifying the zoom settingsTo modify zoom settings, do any of the following:

See also Zooming the model (125)

Zooming with keyboard shortcutsTo zoom by using keyboard shortcuts:

1. Place the mouse pointer over the model.2. Do one of the following:

• To zoom in, press Page Up.

• To zoom out, press Page Down.

See also Zooming the model (125)

Rotating the modelYou can use the mouse, keyboard shortcuts, menu commands, or a combination of these techniques to rotate the model in rendered views.

To rotate the model, use any of the following methods:

To Do this

Keep the center point of the view in the middle of the view window

Click Tools > Options > Centered Zooms.

If this option is off, the mouse pointer position determines the center point of zooming.

Define the zoom ratio when using a 3-button mouse

Use the advanced option XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO.

Define the zoom ratio when scrolling

Use the advanced option XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE.

Define the zoom ratio when scrolling and holding down the wheel

Use the advanced option XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.

To Do this

Rotate using the middle mouse button

1. Hold down Ctrl and click and drag with the middle mouse button to rotate the model.

2. To relocate the center of rotation, press v, and then pick a position in the view.

Tekla Structures rotates the model around this view point.

Page 127: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 127

See also Rotation settings (261)

Viewing the model (125)

Moving the modelTo move the entire model, use any of the following methods:

Rotate using the left mouse button

1. Press Ctrl+R.2. Pick a position in the view.

Tekla Structures rotates the model around this view point.

3. Click and drag with the left mouse button to rotate the model.

Rotate using menu commands or keyboard shortcuts

• Click View > Rotate and select one of the commands.

The center of rotation is fixed in the center of the work area.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

Automatically set the rotation center

1. Click Tools > Options > Automatic Rotation Center to switch on automatic rotation centering.

2. Hold down Ctrl and click and drag with the middle mouse button to rotate the model.

The rotation center is automatically set at the location you clicked.

Tip: When Automatic Rotation Center is switched off, you can temporarily activate it by holding down Ctrl+Shift while you click and drag with the middle mouse button.

Define a specific rotation angle

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Type a rotation angle in the Rotation around Z or Rotation around X field.

3. Click Modify.

To Do this

To Do this

Move the model using the middle mouse button

1. To activate the middle button pan, click Tools > Options > Middle Button Pan, or Shift+M. A checkmark appears next to the menu command if the middle button pan is already active.

2. Hold down the middle mouse button and drag the model anywhere within the view.

Page 128: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 128

See also Viewing the model (125)

Flying through the modelUsing the Fly command, you can travel through a model, changing direction and varying the speed as you go. You can also adjust the field of view setting, which can be useful when flying in a tight space.

To fly through a model:

1. Set view projection to Perspective.a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.b In the Projection list box, select Perspective.c Click Modify.

2. Optional: Adjust the field of view setting.a Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.b Modify the advanced option XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW.c Click OK.

3. Click View > Fly.4. Select a view. The mouse pointer changes into an arrow and a cross. The arrow indicates the

current flying direction.

5. Drag the mouse to move around in the model.• To fly forward, move the mouse forward.

• To change the flying direction, drag the mouse in the desired direction.The flying speed grows exponentially when you are approaching the model from a distance.

• To move up or down, hold down Ctrl and drag the mouse forward or backward.

• To change the camera angle, scroll with the mouse wheel.• To fly in the in the direction of the camera angle, hold down Shift and scroll forward or

backward.

6. To stop flying, press Esc.

See also XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW

Move the model using the Pan command

1. Press P or click View > Move > Pan to activate dynamic panning.The mouse pointer changes to a hand.

2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse anywhere within the view.

3. To stop panning, press Esc.

Move the model using keyboard shortcuts or menu commands

Do one of the following:

• Use the up, down, left and right arrows on the keyboard.

• Click View > Move and then select one of the commands.

To Do this

Page 129: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 129

Viewing the model (125)

Creating a clip planeClip planes enable you to focus in on the required detail in the model. You can create up to six clip planes in any rendered model view.

To create a clip plane:

1. Click View > Create Clip Plane.2. Select a plane. The clip plane symbol appears in the model:

3. Repeat step 2 to create as many clip planes as needed.4. To finish creating clip planes, press Esc.

5. To delete a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and press Delete.

See also Viewing the model (125)

Creating a screenshotA screenshot is a picture of a dialog box, view, or the entire Tekla Structures window. You can use screenshots in posters, brochures, or other material to show projects carried out using Tekla Structures.

To create a high resolution screenshot of a rendered view:

1. Ensure that the view type is set to Rendered.2. Click Tools > Screenshot > Custom...

To move a clip plane, click the clip plane scissor symbol and drag it to a new location.

Page 130: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the modelExamining the model 130

3. To define which view to create the screenshot from, click Pick view and select a view.4. Under Capture, select Rendered view.5. Click Options... The Screenshot Options dialog box appears.6. Set the desired properties and click OK.7. Click Capture.

See also Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista (130)

Screenshot settings (261)

Creating a screenshot in Windows VistaDue to a performance problem in Windows Vista, the screenshot commands might not always work properly. Use any of the following workarounds to solve this problem:

• Use the command Tools > Screenshot > Custom...• Adjust the visual effects for best performance in the Performance Options dialog box in

Windows Vista.• Use the built-in Snipping Tool in Windows Vista to capture screenshots.

See also Creating a screenshot (129)

Saving a screenshot in bitmap formatBy default, screenshots are created as Portable Network Graphics (.png) files. You can also save a screenshot in bitmap (.bmp) format to use it, for example, as a custom component thumbnail.

To save a screenshot in bitmap format:

1. Click Tools > Screenshot > Custom...2. Select Place on clipboard.3. Click Capture.4. Paste the screenshot in your graphics editor and save it in .bmp format.

See also Creating a screenshot (129)

Printing a screenshotYou can have Tekla Structures automatically print out a screenshot using the default printer.

To print a screenshot:

1. Click Tools > Screenshot > Print Screenshot to activate automatic printing.2. Click Tools > Screenshot and select one of the commands:

• To capture the entire Tekla Structures window, select Main Frame.

• To capture the last dialog box displayed, select Dialog.• To capture the active view, select View.

• To capture the active view without borders, select View without Borders.

See also Creating a screenshot (129)

The software that you use to open the screenshot may have a limit for the number of pixels.

Page 131: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 131

Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model

See also Viewing the model (125)

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command

7.2 Showing and hiding objectsThe visibility of objects in a view depends on the following settings:

• work area• view depth

• view settings

• view filter

Command Keyboard shortcut

Zoom original Home

Zoom previous End

Zoom in Page Up

Zoom out Page Down

Rotate using mouse Ctrl+R

Rotate using keyboard Ctrl+arrow keys

Shift+arrow keys

Disable view rotation F8

Set view rotation point V

Auto rotate Shift+R

Shift+T

Pan P

Middle button pan Shift+M

Move right

Move left

Move down

Move up

arrow keys

3D/Plane view Ctrl+P

Fly Shift+F

Create clip plane Shift+X

Screenshot F9

F10

F11

F12

Center by cursor Ins

Page 132: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 132

• object representation settings

Work area and view depth are like two virtual boxes. Objects that have their handles partially or totally inside both boxes are visible. Newly created objects are also visible outside the view depth but never outside the work area. When you redraw a view, only the objects inside the view depth are displayed.

See also Defining which objects are displayed (132)

Representation options (132)

Hiding selected parts (134)

Hiding unselected parts (134)

Showing parts with exact lines (135)

Showing parts with high accuracy (136)

Showing and hiding assemblies (136)

Showing and hiding components (137)

Object groups (138)

Object representation settings (139)

Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options (137)

Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options (138)

Defining which objects are displayedTo define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.3. Select or clear check boxes to specify which objects are visible in the view.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Display settings (264)

Representation optionsIn rendered views, you can define separately how Tekla Structures displays parts and component objects. The following options are available:

Option Description Example

Wireframe Part outlines are displayed, surfaces are not, i.e. parts are transparent.

In this example, component objects are displayed as Rendered.

Page 133: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 133

Shaded Wireframe

Part outlines are displayed. Parts are transparent, and their surfaces are shaded.

In this example, component objects are displayed as Rendered.

Hidden Lines Parts are not transparent, i.e. underlying parts are not visible.

Rendered Part surfaces are displayed, i.e. parts are not transparent.

Show Only Selected

Selected parts are displayed. Other parts are almost completely transparent.

This option is useful, for example, when viewing clash check results in a large model.

Use the shortcuts Ctrl+1...5 and Shift+1...5 to set the desired representation for parts in the model and components.

Option Description Example

Page 134: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 134

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options (137)

Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options (138)

Hiding selected partsYou can quickly hide selected parts in a view. This can be useful, for example, when you want to temporarily hide parts in order to see the parts behind them.

To hide selected parts:

1. Click View > Hide Part.2. Select the parts you want to hide.

The selected parts become invisible.

3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:• Click View > Redraw All.• Right-click and select Redraw view.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Hiding unselected parts (134)

Hiding unselected partsTo hide all unselected parts in a view:

1. Select the parts that you want to keep visible.

Page 135: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 135

2. Right-click and select Show Only Selected. The unselected parts become almost transparent.

3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:• Click View > Redraw All.• Right-click and select Redraw View.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Hiding selected parts (134)

Showing parts with exact linesUse the Show Part with Exact Lines command to temporarily display a part with exact lines even if you are using the Fast representation option for parts.

To display a part with exact lines:

1. Select the part.2. Click View > Representation > Show Part with Exact Lines.3. Click the view in which you want to display exact lines.4. To clear the exact lines effect, click View > Redraw All.

To completely hide the unselected parts, hold down the Shift key when selecting the command.

To show the unselected parts as sticks, hold down the Ctrl key when selecting the command.

Page 136: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 136

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Showing parts with high accuracyYou can temporarily display parts with the highest possible level of accuracy. This can be useful, for example, when checking a large model, because the entire model can still be displayed in the Fast or Exact representation mode but the individual part can be shown in more detail.

To display selected parts with high accuracy:

1. Select the parts.2. Right-click, and then hold down the Shift key while selecting Show with Exact Lines from the

pop-up menu.Tekla Structures displays the selected parts with the highest possible level of accuracy.

3. To clear the high accuracy effect, right-click and select Show with Exact Lines from the pop-up menu.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Display settings (264)

XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY

Showing and hiding assembliesDo any of the following:

Normal display mode

High accuracy mode

Page 137: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 137

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Refreshing views (42)

Showing and hiding componentsDo any of the following:

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Refreshing views (42)

Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options

To Do this

Display the contents of an assembly

• Right-click the assembly and select Assembly > Show Assembly from the pop-up menu.

Tekla Structures displays all parts, bolts, welds, cuts, fittings, and other details belonging to the assembly, even if you had defined them as hidden in the view properties.

Hide an assembly 1. Select the assembly you want to hide.2. Right-click and select Assembly > Hide from the

pop-up menu.

Make a hidden assembly visible again

Do one of the following:

• Right-click and select Redraw View.

• Click View > Redraw All.

To Do this

Display the contents of a component

• Click View > Representation > Show Component Content and select a component.

Tekla Structures displays all bolts, welds, and other details belonging to the component, even if you had defined them as hidden in the view properties.

Hide a component 1. Select the component you want to hide.2. Right-click and select Hide from the pop-up

menu.

Make a hidden component visible again

Do one of the following:

• Right-click and select Redraw View.

• Click View > Redraw All.

Command Keyboard shortcut

Wireframe Ctrl+1

Shaded Wireframe Ctrl+2

Page 138: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 138

See also Representation options (132)

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command

Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options

See also Representation options (132)

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command

Object groupsObject groups are sets of rules that can be used to group objects based on selected properties and conditions.

Use object groups to control the transparency and coloring of model objects. Object groups are also used in project status visualizations.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Creating an object group (138)

Copying an object group to another model (139)

Deleting an object group (139)

Visualizing project status (143)

Creating an object groupTo create an object group:

1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object Representation dialog box.

2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.3. Modify the object group settings.

a Click Add row.b Select options from the Category, Property, and Condition list boxes.c In the Value list box, type a value or select one from the model.d Add more rows, and use the And/Or options or parentheses to create more complex

rules.4. Select the check boxes next to all object group rules that you want to enable.

Hidden Lines Ctrl+3

Rendered Ctrl+4

Show Only Selected Ctrl+5

Command Keyboard shortcut

Command Keyboard shortcut

Wireframe Shift+1

Shaded Wireframe Shift+2

Hidden Lines Shift+3

Rendered Shift+4

Show Only Selected Shift+5

Page 139: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 139

The check boxes define which rules are enabled and effective.

5. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.6. Click Save as to save the object group.

See also Object groups (138)

Selecting values from the model

Copying an object group to another modelTo copy an object group to another model:

1. Select the object group you want to copy.The object groups you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.

2. Select where you want to copy the object group.• To make an object group available in another model, copy the file to the attributes

folder of the destination model.• To make an object group available in all models, copy the file to the folder defined by the

advanced option XS_PROJECT or XS_FIRM.

3. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object groups (138)

XS_FIRM

XS_PROJECT

Deleting an object groupTo delete an object group:

1. Delete the object group file located in the model’s attributes folder.Object groups have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object groups (138)

Object representation settingsUse object representation settings to modify the color and transparency of objects in the model view, and to create customized presentations of defined objects.

For example, the following images show the same model with different object representation settings:

Page 140: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 140

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Creating object representation settings (140)

Copying object representation settings to another model (142)

Deleting object representation settings (143)

Creating object representation settingsCreate object representation settings to define the color and transparency of objects in a model.

To create object representation settings:

1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation...2. Click Add row.3. Select a predefined object group from the Object group list box.4. Use the Color list box to define the color of the objects in the object group.5. Use the Transparency list box to define the transparency of the objects in the object group.6. Repeat steps 3–5 for each row you add.7. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the rows.

If an object belongs to several object groups, the coloring and visibility of the objects defined on the top row is applied to that object.

8. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button

Standard object representation

Only parts whose profile name starts with IPE* or HEA* are visible

Objects whose user-defined attribute Planned erection date is set to 01/05/2009 are displayed in blue, while all other parts are 90% transparent

Page 141: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 141

9. Click Save as to save the set of object representation settings.

See also Object representation settings (139)

Color settings for object groups (266)

Transparency settings for object groups (267)

Defining your own colors to model object groups (141)

Defining your own colors to model object groupsYou can customize the color of model objects by selecting a specific color for each object group. You can use an unlimited number of colors. This option gives you more freedom in visualizing the different types of objects in the model.

To define colors for object groups:

1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation.The Object Representation dialog box appears.

2. Load the object representation settings that you want to change.3. Click Add row to add a new object group or select an existing object group from the Object

Group list.4. Click the Color list arrow and then click Choose color....5. Do one of the following:

• Click a color in the Basic colors palette or in the color window.

• Click Define Custom Colors and create a color of your own:

a Click a color in the color window and then click the desired color depth on the color bar on the right, or enter RGB values.

If your object representation setting does not contain the group All, Tekla Structures adds that row to the bottom of the list when you click Modify, Apply, or OK.

Page 142: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Showing and hiding objectsExamining the model 142

b Click Add to Custom Colors.c Click the color in the Custom colors palette to select it.

6. Click OK.7. Select the desired Transparency option.8. Click Save to save the changes.9. Click Modify to change the representation of the objects.When you open the Object Representation dialog box the next time, the Color list shows above the dashed line a maximum of 10 colors that you last defined.

Information about the colors that you define for the object groups is stored in the used_custom_colors.clr file, which is located in the attributes folder under the model folder. Information about the colors that you add in the Custom colors palette is stored in the xs_user.xxx file in the model folder (xxx is your user name).

See also Creating object representation settings (140)

Copying object representation settings to another modelTo copy object representation settings to another model:

1. Select the object representation settings you want to copy.

Page 143: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 143

The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they have the file name extension *.rep.

2. Select where you want to copy the settings.• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes folder of

the destination model.• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.

3. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object representation settings (139)

Deleting object representation settingsTo delete object representation settings:

1. Delete the object representation file located in the model’s attributes folder.Object representation settings have the file name extension *.rep.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object representation settings (139)

7.3 Visualizing project statusUse the Project Status Visualization tool to review the status of modeling objects in a specific time frame. For example, use this tool to:

• display the erection schedule for groups of parts using different colors

• identify the parts that are scheduled to be fabricated during a specific time period.

To create project status visualizations, you need to have predefined object representation settings that include object groups based on date rules.

See also Creating a visualization (143)

Copying visualization settings to another model (144)

Deleting visualization settings (144)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (144)

Visualizing project status

Creating a visualizationTo create a project status visualization:

1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. Modify the visualization settings.a In the Object representation list box, select one of the predefined object

representation settings.b Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.

You can define tasks for parts and assemblies with Task Manager. Project status visualization can then be based on the tasks.

Page 144: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 144

c Define the length of the time step.3. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.4. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.5. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.6. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (144)

Copying visualization settings to another modelTo copy project status visualization settings to another model:

1. Select the visualization settings you want to copy.The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they have the file name extension *.4d.

2. Select where you want to copy the settings.• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes folder of

the destination model.• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.

3. Include a copy of the object representation settings file (*.rep) and object group files (*.PObjGrp) in the attributes and system folders to ensure that all the files will work correctly.

4. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Deleting visualization settingsTo delete project status visualization settings:

1. Delete the visualization file located in the model’s attributes folder.Project status visualization settings have the file name extension *.4d.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a projectThis section explains how to visualize erection schedules using the project status visualization tool available in Tekla Structures.

In the following example, you will first define an erection schedule for parts using a specific user-defined attribute. After that, you will create object groups to define which objects are shown in the model, and object representation settings to define how the objects are shown in the model. Finally, you will visualize the erection schedule using the project status visualization tool.

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Defining an erection schedule (145)

Example: Creating object groups (145)

Creating object representation settings (140)

Example: Creating visualization settings (146)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule (147)

Page 145: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 145

Example: Defining an erection scheduleIn this example, you will define an erection schedule for parts using the user-defined attribute Erection Planned start.

To define an erection schedule:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click User-defined attributes...3. On the Workflow tab, modify the value of the user-defined attribute Erection Planned start.

4. Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared.5. Select the Erection Planned start check box.6. Select all the parts for which you want to use the same erection date.

7. Click Modify.8. Repeat steps 1–7 for each group of parts in your model.

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Creating object groupsIn this example, you will create an object group to define which objects are shown in the model.

To create the object group:

1. Click View > Representation > Object representation... to open the Object Representation dialog box.

2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.3. Create an object group that includes all objects whose user-defined attribute Erection Planned

start is earlier than or equal to the review date.a In the Category list box, select Object.b In the Property list box, select PLANNED_START_E.c In the Condition list box, select Earlier than or equal.d In the Value list box, select Select date... The Select Date dialog box appears.e Select Review date and click OK.

4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the group. For example, plan_same_or_before_review_date.

5. Click Save as.

See also Object groups (138)

Visualizing project status (143)

To make it easier to select parts, create a separate selection filter for each group of parts.

Page 146: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 146

Example: Creating object representation settingsIn this example, you will create object representation settings to define how the objects are shown in the model.

To create object representation settings:

1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object Representation dialog box.

2. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group that you created in Example: Creating object groups (145).

a Click Add row.b In the Object group list box, select the object group you just created.c In the Color list box, select Color by class.d In the Transparency list box, select Visible.

3. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group All.a Click Add row.b In the Object group list box, select the object group All.c In the Color list box, select Color by class.d In the Transparency list box, select Hidden.

4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the object representation settings. For example, planned_start_erection_date.

5. Click Save as.

See also Object representation settings (139)

Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Creating visualization settingsIn this example, you will create project status visualization settings.

To create visualization settings:

1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. Define the length of the time step.3. Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.4. In the Object representation list box, select the object representation setting you created in

Example: Creating object representation settings (146).5. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.6. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the visualization.7. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.

Page 147: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 147

See also Visualizing project status (143)

Example: Visualizing the erection scheduleIn this example, you will visualize the erection schedule using the Project Status Visualization tool.

To visualize the erection schedule:

1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. In the list box next to the Load button, select the visualization setting you created in Example: Creating visualization settings (146).

3. Click Load.4. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.

The images below show how the objects are shown when you change the review date:

Review date Visualization

November 02

Page 148: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 148

November 05

November 08

November 11

Review date Visualization

Page 149: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 149

See also Visualizing project status (143)

November 14

November 17

November 20

Review date Visualization

Page 150: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Visualizing project statusExamining the model 150

Page 151: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Inquiring the modelChecking the model 151

8 Checking the model

This section describes a variety of tools you can use to ensure the model does not contain errors.

See also Inquiring the model (151)

Measuring objects (153)

Detecting clashes (156)

Diagnosing and repairing the model (166)

Comparing parts or assemblies (167)

Finding distant objects (167)

Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model (168)

8.1 Inquiring the modelUse the commands on the Tools > Inquire menu to display information about model objects and model size.

See also Inquiring object properties (151)

Using the Custom Inquiry tool (152)

Inquiring object propertiesUse the Inquire object command to display the properties of a particular object, or a group of objects, within the model.

To inquire object properties:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.2. Select an object.

Tekla Structures displays the object properties in a separate window.

See also Inquiring the model (151)

Object property report templates (151)

Object property report templatesWhen you view object properties using the Inquire object command, Tekla Structures uses the following report templates:

Page 152: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Inquiring the modelChecking the model 152

You can modify these templates according to your needs. For more information on how to use templates, see the Template Editor user documentation.

See also Inquiring object properties (151)

Using the Custom Inquiry toolUse the Custom Inquiry tool to display information of the selected model object in a separate window that you can drag and drop to any position on the screen. By default, the tool shows the total area, weight, and length of the selected model object.

To display object properties using the Custom Inquiry tool:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.

2. Select a part.Tekla Structures displays the part properties in the tool window.

See also Inquiring the model (151)

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool (152)

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (153)

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry toolYou can define what information is displayed in the Custom Inquiry dialog box.

To modify the contents of the tool window:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.

2. Click Manage contents...The Manage Contents dialog box appears. The Attributes list contains all of the available attributes. The Contents of Custom Inquiry list contains the attributes that are displayed in the tool window.

3. Optional: Define which attributes are shown in the Attributes list.• To modify the default attributes, edit the InquiryTool.config file in the ..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes folder.

• To create new calculated attributes, click Add…. You can use standard mathematical symbols (+, -, *, and /) to form equations.

• To modify the calculated attributes, click Edit....

4. Define which attributes are shown in the tool window.

Part type Template

Parts TS_Report_Inquire_Part.rpt

Assemblies TS_Report_Inquire_Assembly.rpt

Cast units TS_Report_Inquire_Cast_Unit.rpt

Welds TS_Report_Inquire_Welding.rpt

Reference models TS_Report_Inquire_Reference.rpt

Reinforcement TS_Report_Inquire_Reinforcement.rpt

Page 153: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Measuring objectsChecking the model 153

• To add more attributes to the tool window, click an item in the Attributes list and then click the right arrow button.

• To remove attributes from the tool window, click an item in the Contents of Custom Inquiry list and then click the left arrow button.

• To change the order of the attributes, use the Up and Down buttons.

• To change the formula of an attribute, click the down arrow and select a different formula (SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, or MIN) from the list box.

See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (152)

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (153)

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool

Use the InquiryTool.config file to control which attributes are shown as default attributes in the Manage Contents dialog box in the Custom Inquiry tool. The file is located in the folder defined with the advanced option XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY , and under ..\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes in that folder path.

For example, if XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY is set to C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\17.1\environments\common\macros, the file InquiryTool.config is located in the folder C:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\17.1\environments\common\macros\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes.

To add new attributes to the InquiryTool.config file:

1. Open the InquiryTool.config file in any standard text editor.2. Copy the entire contents of [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to the end of the file.3. Change the position number of the new attribute.

For example, change [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to [ATTR_CONTENT_66].

4. Modify the NAME, DISPLAY_NAME, DATATYPE, UNIT, and DECIMAL values of the new attribute. Use the attribute names and definitions that are included in the contentattributes_global.lst file.

5. Change the TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT value to reflect the total number of attributes in the file.For example, change TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=65 to TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=66.

6. Save the file.

See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (152)

XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY

8.2 Measuring objectsUse the commands on the Tools > Measure menu to measure angles, arcs, the distance between two points and between bolts.

All measurements are temporary. The measurements appear in the rendered view window until you update or redraw the window.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 154: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Measuring objectsChecking the model 154

See also Measuring distances (154)

Measuring angles (154)

Measuring arcs (154)

Measuring bolt spacing (155)

Measuring distancesTo measure horizontal, vertical and user-defined distances:

1. Press Ctrl+P to switch to the plane view.2. Click Tools > Measure and select a command that measures distances.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.5. Pick a point to indicate on which side of the dimension line you want the number to appear.

See also Measuring objects (153)

Measuring anglesTo measure angles:

1. Click or Tools > Measure > Angle.2. Pick the center point.3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.

See also Measuring objects (153)

Measuring arcsTo measure the radius and length of an arc:

1. Click or Tools > Measure > Arc.2. Pick the starting point.3. Pick the middle point.

This can be any point along the arc between the starting and end points.

4. Pick the end point.

Page 155: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Measuring objectsChecking the model 155

See also Measuring objects (153)

Measuring bolt spacingYou can measure distances between bolts in a bolt group. Tekla Structures also gives you the edge distances between the bolts and a selected part.

To measure bolt spacing:

1. Click or Tools > Measure > Bolt Spacing.2. Select a bolt group.3. Select a part.

See also Measuring objects (153)

Starting point

Middle point

End point

Arc radius

Arc length

Page 156: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 156

8.3 Detecting clashesUse the Clash Check Manager tool to find parts, bolts, or reference model objects that collide. Clashes of objects that only touch one another are not included in the clash check results.

The following reference model file types are supported in clash checking:

• IFC

• DWG• DGN

If you are checking the reference model for clashes, you need to use the Select components

selection switch .

See also Clash Check Manager (156)

Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts (165)

Selecting a reference model

Selecting a reference model object

Clash Check ManagerUse Clash Check Manager to detect and manage clashes in a model. Use the sections and storys created in the Model Organizer to run a controlled clash check.

If you want to use another Tekla Structures model as a reference model, you must export it in IFC format to be able to use it in clash checking.

If you are checking reference model objects for clashes, you need

to use the Select objects in components selection switch .

Page 157: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 157

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (157)

Grouping clashes (160)

Viewing the details of a clash (161)

Searching for clashes (163)

Printing a list of clashes (163)

Opening and saving clash check sessions (164)

Finding clashes using Clash Check ManagerTo find clashes in a model:

1. Click Tools > Clash Check Manager.2. In the model, select the objects you want to include in the clash check.

Alternatively, if you are using Model Organizer, select the sections and storys for which you want to run the clash check. Right-click and select Select in the Model.

In the Full and Construction Management configurations, you can use all Clash Check Manager functions.

In other Tekla Structures configurations, you can use the basic clash detection functions, such as run, re-run, and save.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

Page 158: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 158

3. Click to check the objects.You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, the status bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.

4. To highlight a clash in the model, select a row in the list of clashes.The related model objects are selected.

5. To zoom the active view so that the selected objects are shown in the center of the view, double-click a row.

6. If you want to include more objects in the clash check, select the desired model objects and re-run the clash check.New clashes are appended to the end of the list.

See also Symbols used in clash checking (158)

Managing the list of clashes (159)

Changing the status of clashes (159)

Changing the priority of clashes (160)

Symbols used in clash checkingClash Check Manager uses the following flags to indicate the state of clashes:

Do not run the clash check for the entire model. For best results, run the clash check only for appropriate sections and storys.

If you cannot find the clashes in the model, change the representation of objects to Show Only Selected (Ctrl+5) for better visibility.

After removing or modifying objects, you can re-run clash check to see if the clash still exists. To do this, select the desired rows in the list of clashes and re-run clash check.

Flag State Description

(none) Active The default state. The clash is not new, modified, resolved, or missing.

New All clashes are marked as new when they are found for the first time.

Page 159: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 159

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (157)

Managing the list of clashes To manage the list of clashes in Clash Check Manager:

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (157)

Changing the status of clashesTo change the status of clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose status you want to change.2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.3. Select Status and then one of the status options:

• Assign

• Fix

• Approve• Ignore

• Reopen

Modified If the object has been modified (for example, if the profile has been changed), the state changes to modified when you re-run the clash check.

Only certain object properties affect this flag. To see which properties have an effect, right-click one of the column headings. Both visible and hidden properties affect the flag.

Resolved If the objects no longer clash, the state changes to resolved when you re-run the clash check.

Missing If one or both of the clashing objects have been removed from the model, the state changes to missing when you re-run the clash check.

Flag State Description

To Do this

Change the sort order of clash results

Click the heading of the desired column to alternate between the ascending and descending sort order.

Select multiple rows in the list of clashes

Hold down Ctrl or Shift while selecting rows.

Show or hide a column 1. Right-click one of the colum headings to open a pop-up menu.

2. Click any of the list items to show or hide them.

A check mark in front of the item indicates that it is visible.

Page 160: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 160

Limitations

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (157)

Changing the priority of clashesTo change the priority of clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose priority you want to change.2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.3. Select Priority and then one of the status options:

• High• Medium

• Low

Limitations

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (157)

Grouping clashesYou can combine several clashes into a group so that the clashes are treated as a single unit.

To group clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes you want to group.2. Right-click and select Group > Group from the pop-up menu.3. If you want to add clashes to an already existing group, select the clashes and the group, and

then repeat step 2.

You can change the status of clashes only in the Full and Construction Management configurations.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

You can change the priority of clashes only in the Full and Construction Management configurations.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

You cannot create nested groups of clashes.

Page 161: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 161

Limitations

See also Ungrouping clashes (161)

Ungrouping clashesTo ungroup clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clash group you want to ungroup.2. Right-click and select Group > Ungroup from the pop-up menu.

See also Grouping clashes (160)

Viewing the details of a clashUse the Clash Information dialog box to view more detailed information about a clash. For example, you can view the profile, material and class of the objects that collide. This can be useful especially when you view clash groups that contain more than two objects.

To view the details of a clash:

1. Select the clash or clash group whose details you want to view.2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.

See also Adding comments to a clash (161)

Viewing the history of a clash (162)

Adding comments to a clashYou can add comments to clashes and clash groups. For example, you might use comments as reminders to yourself and other users.

To add a comment:

1. Select the clash or clash group you want to comment on.2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.3. Go to the Comments tab.

4. Click to open the Add comment dialog box.5. Enter your comment in the Comment box.6. Optional: Modify the author name and the date if needed.7. Click OK.

You can group clashes only in the Full and Construction Management configurations.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

If more than one clash or clash group is being selected at the same time, the Clash Information option appears dimmed in the pop-up menu.

Page 162: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 162

Limitations

See also Modifying a clash comment (162)

Removing a clash comment (162)

Modifying a clash commentTo modify a comment:

1. Select the clash or clash group whose comment you want to modify.2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.3. Go to the Comments tab.4. Select the comment you want to modify.

5. Click to open the Edit comment dialog box.6. Modify the comment.7. Click OK.

See also Adding comments to a clash (161)

Removing a clash comment (162)

Removing a clash commentTo remove a comment from a clash:

1. Select the clash or clash group whose comment you want to remove.2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.3. Go to the Comments tab.4. Select the comment you want to remove.

5. Click .

See also Adding comments to a clash (161)

Modifying a clash comment (162)

Viewing the history of a clashYou can view the history of a particular clash. For example, you can see when and by whom the clash was detected.

To view the history of a clash:

1. Select a clash or a clash group.2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.3. Go to the History tab.

The history information of the clash is displayed.

See also Viewing the details of a clash (161)

You can add, modify and remove comments only in the Full and Construction Management configurations.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

Page 163: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 163

Searching for clashesUse the Search box to find clashes based on search terms. The more search terms you enter, the more refined your search will be. For example, if you enter column 8112, only the clashes that match both of these terms are displayed.

To search for clashes:

1. Open the clash check session you want to find clashes from.2. In the Search box, enter the words to search for.

The search results are displayed as you type.

3. To narrow your search, enter more characters.

4. To display all the clashes again, click next to the Search box.

See also Clash Check Manager (156)

Printing a list of clashesYou can print lists of clashes. You can control the print settings the same way as in any standard Windows application.

To print a list of clashes:

1. Open the clash check session you want to print.

2. Click Print...3. Optional: Modify the print settings if needed.4. Click Print.

See also Previewing a list of clashes before printing (163)

Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation (164)

Previewing a list of clashes before printingUse the options in the Print preview dialog box to see what a list of clashes will look like when it is printed.

To preview a list of clashes:

To Do this

Open the Print preview dialog box

In Clash Check Manager, click the arrow button

next to the icon and select Print preview... from the pop-up menu.

Select how many pages to view at a time

Click one of the Page Layout buttons:

If the list of clashes is very long, it might be spread out on several pages.

Zoom the page in or out Click the arrow button next to the button and select an option from the pop-up menu.

Print the current page Click .

Close the Print preview dialog box.

Click .

Page 164: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 164

See also Printing a list of clashes (163)

Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation (164)

Setting the paper size, margins and page orientationBefore printing a list of clashes, you can set the paper size, margins, and page orientation in the Page Setup dialog box.

To set up the page for printing:

1. Click the arrow button next to the icon and select Page setup... from the pop-up menu.

2. In the Size box, select the paper size you want to use.3. In the Source box, select the correct paper source.4. Under Orientation, select one of the page orientation options.

• Portrait: vertical page orientation• Landscape: horizontal page orientation

5. Under Margins, enter values for the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom margins.6. Click OK to save the changes.

See also Printing a list of clashes (163)

Previewing a list of clashes before printing (163)

Opening and saving clash check sessionsTo open or save sessions in Clash Check Manager, do any of the following:

The options for paper size and paper source are printer-dependent. To use different paper options, select another printer in the Print dialog box and click Apply.

To Do this

Open a session1. Click .2. In the Open dialog box, select a session.3. Click OK.

Start a new sessionClick .

Clash Check Manager clears the list of clashes without running clash check.

Save the current sessionClick .

Page 165: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detecting clashesChecking the model 165

See also Clash Check Manager (156)

Defining a clash check clearance area for boltsTo check if bolts collide with profiles and if there is enough space to fix the bolt, you can define a clash check clearance area for bolts.

To define a clearance area for bolts:

1. Click Tools > Options > Options...2. In the Options dialog box, go to the Clash check page.3. Modify the bolt clearance values.

If the fields are empty, Tekla Structures uses the default value 1.00.

Save the current session with a another name or in another location

1. Click the arrow button next to the icon. A pop-up menu appears.

2. Click Save as.3. In the Save As dialog box, browse to the

folder where you want to save the session.4. In the File name box, enter a new name.5. Click Save.

Save only selected clashes 1. In the list of clashes, select the clashes you want to save.

2. Click the arrow button next to the icon. A pop-up menu appears.

3. Click Save selected.

By default, clash check sessions are saved as XML files in the ..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\Clashes folder. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically when you open Clash Check Manager for the first time.

To Do this

Page 166: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Diagnosing and repairing the modelChecking the model 166

4. Ensure that you have selected the check box in front of each field.If you clear the check boxes, the clearance will be zero.

5. Click Apply or OK.

See also Detecting clashes (156)

Reverting to the old clash checking functionalityIf you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In that case you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes with reference models.

For more information on the old clash checking functionality, see XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK and XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES.

See also Detecting clashes (156)

8.4 Diagnosing and repairing the modelUse the Diagnose & Repair Model commands to check and to repair errors and inconsistencies in the structure of model objects and the library database (xslib). By diagnosing and repairing the model you can ensure, for example, that empty assemblies are removed and that unused points and attributes are deleted. Repairing the model also corrects invalid object relations and hierarchies. We recommend you to diagnose and to repair your model regularly to maintain the consistency and integrity of your model databases.

To diagnose or repair a model or a library database:

1. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model.2. Select the appropriate Diagnose or Repair command.The errors and inconsistencies found in the model are listed in a report. Some of them are automatically corrected, some of them are warnings that you need to correct manually, for example, change the unknown profiles.

If the model does not contain any errors or inconsistencies, a message is displayed in the status bar.

See also Checking the model (151)

Diagnose and repair model results (167)

d is the larger value of the bolt head or nut diameters

Clash check clearance area

If Tekla Structures cannot find the bolt head or nut diameter in the bolt catalog, it uses the shank diameter instead.

Page 167: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Comparing parts or assembliesChecking the model 167

Diagnose and repair model resultsThe following table lists the most common errors and inconsistencies found when diagnosing and repairing the model.

See also Diagnosing and repairing the model (166)

8.5 Comparing parts or assembliesTo compare two parts or assemblies:

1. Select the objects you want to compare.• To compare parts, select two parts in the model.

• To compare assemblies, select a part in each assembly.

2. Click Tools > Compare, and then select either Parts or Assemblies.Tekla Structures displays the results on the status bar.

See also Checking the model (151)

8.6 Finding distant objectsWhen the work area is huge, the model may contain some distant objects that are not easy to find. Use the Find Distant Objects command to find these objects.

To find distant objects:

1. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Find Distant Objects.Tekla Structures displays a list of object IDs. At the end of the list, Tekla Structures displays additional six objects that have the biggest and smallest x, y, or z coordinates.

Diagnosis result Description Action needed

Empty assembly The assembly does not contain any objects.

Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Repair Model to delete the assembly.

Missing assembly A part is not included in any assembly.

Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Repair Model to create an assembly and to move the part to it.

Illegal profile An unknown profile has been found.

Change the profile to an allowed profile.

Page 168: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Keyboard shortcuts for checking the modelChecking the model 168

2. Select an object in the list.3. Right-click and select a command from the pop-up menu.

You can, for example, inquire or delete the object.

See also XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE

XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE

Checking the model (151)

8.7 Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model

See also Checking the model (151)

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command

Command Keyboard shortcut

Inquire object Shift+I

Free measure F

Clash check Shift+C

Create report Ctrl+B

Open the Views list Ctrl+I

Open Drawing list Ctrl+L

Print drawings Shift+P

Open component catalog Ctrl+F

Create AutoConnection Ctrl+J

Advanced options Ctrl+E

Phase manager Ctrl+H

Page 169: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

What is numberingNumbering the model 169

9 Numbering the model

This section explains how to change numbering settings and apply numbering in Tekla Structures.

Contents • What is numbering (169)• What affects numbering (170)

• Numbering objects (174)

• Defining numbering series (171)• Viewing the numbering history (184)

9.1 What is numberingTekla Structures assigns a mark to each part and assembly in a model. The mark includes part or assembly prefix and position number, and other elements (such as profile or material grade). This process is called numbering. Part numbers are vital in the fabrication, shipping, and erection stages of construction.

Tekla Structures also uses numbers to identify parts, cast units, and assemblies when producing drawings and reports, and exporting models. You must have Tekla Structures number the model before you can create single-part, assembly, cast unit, and multi-drawings, or export files from a model.

Tekla Structures uses part numbers in many tasks, for example to:

• connect a drawing with the right part, cast unit, or assembly• report the properties of identical parts, cast units, and assemblies

• identify part information when exporting parts to another software.

If the numbering of a part or assembly is not up to date, a question mark (?) is displayed in the part label and in the Inquire Object dialog box. For example:

See also Numbering objects (174)

What affects numbering (170)

Inquiring object properties (151)

Page 170: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

What affects numberingNumbering the model 170

9.2 What affects numberingTekla Structures treats objects as different, and therefore numbers them differently, if the following properties differ:

• Beam orientation

• Column orientation

• Reinforcement• Cast-in embeds

• Surface treatment (affects only assemblies)

• Pop marks• Contour marking information

• Shortening

• User-defined attributes

To define which properties affect numbering in your model, modify the settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box. For example, if two otherwise identical concrete parts have different names and you select the Part name check box, Tekla Structures gives the parts different numbers.

By default, a part retains its number, as long as only one part has that particular number, regardless of the settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Numbering settings (292)

Identical parts (170)

Identical reinforcements (171)

User-defined attributes in numbering (171)

Identical partsTekla Structures gives parts the same number if the parts are identical in the fabrication or casting. If a part is deformed after fabrication or casting (for example if the part is cambered, shortened, or warped), the final geometry on site and in the model may be different.

Tekla Structures treats parts as identical and gives them the same number if the following basic part properties are the same:

• Part geometry• Casting direction

• Numbering series

• Profile• Material

• Finish

You can set the degree of tolerance for part geometry in the Numbering Setup dialog box. If the geometry of parts differs within this degree of tolerance, Tekla Structures treats the parts as identical for numbering purposes.

Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings.

If the Renumber all option is selected in the Numbering Setup dialog box, Tekla Structures will always carry out full renumbering.

Page 171: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining numbering seriesNumbering the model 171

Class and phase do not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identical parts that belong to different classes or phases.

See also Part properties (267)

Phases (194)

Casting direction (87)

What affects numbering (170)

Identical reinforcementsTekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as identical, and gives them the same number, if the following properties are the same:

• Bar geometry

• Numbering series

• Size• Grade

• Bending radius

Tekla Structures uses the values of the rebar_config.inp file located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder to round bar dimensions up or down. For example, if you set the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions to 5 and the rounding direction to up, Tekla Structures rounds all bar dimensions up to the nearest 5 mm. In that case, two bars with dimensions of 131 mm and 133 mm would both round up to 135 mm. This gives them identical bar geometry.

Class does not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identical reinforcing bars that belong to different classes.

See also Reinforcement

Reinforcement settings for drawings

User-defined attributes in numberingTekla Structures treats parts and reinforcing bars as different, and therefore numbers them differently, if the values of a user-defined attribute differ.

Parts If a user-defined attribute has the variable special_flag set to yes, Tekla Structures takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering parts.

Reinforcements If a user-defined attribute has the variable consider_in_numbering set to yes, Tekla Structures takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering reinforcements.

See also What affects numbering (170)

User-defined attributes (277)

9.3 Defining numbering seriesYou can use a numbering series to divide steel parts, cast units, and assemblies into groups. For example, you can allocate a separate numbering series to different phases or part types.

The name of a numbering series consists of a prefix and a start number. You do not have to define a part prefix (for example, you may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts).

Page 172: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining numbering seriesNumbering the model 172

When you run numbering, Tekla Structures compares parts that belong to the same series with each other. All identical parts in the same numbering series are given the same part number.

Example For example, if you define a numbering series with the prefix P and start number 1001, Tekla Structures numbers that series P1001, P1002, P1003, ...

See also Planning your numbering series (172)

Assigning a numbering series to a part (172)

Assigning a numbering series to an assembly (173)

Family numbers (173)

Overlapping numbering series (174)

Planning your numbering seriesBefore you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you will use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.

To save time, include the numbering series in the default part properties for each type of part before you start modeling.

You may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts, such as plates. If you do this, ensure that you assign a Start number for that numbering series so that it will not overlap other parts.

Example One way to plan the numbering series is to create a table:

See also Defining numbering series (171)

Overlapping numbering series (174)

Assigning a numbering series to a partTo assign a numbering series to a part:

Concrete parts are numbered according to the cast unit numbering settings. For example, if the cast unit prefix is C and the start number is 1, concrete parts will get the part prefix Concrete_C-1.

This applies also to concrete components whose part position prefix is Concrete and start number is 1.

Part type

Part

Prefix

Part

Start number

Assembly

Prefix

Assembly

Start number

Beam PB 1 AB 1

Vertical brace PVB 1 AVB 1

Horizontal brace PHB 1 AHB 1

Rafter PR 1 AR 1

Purlin PP 1 AP 1

Column PC 1 AC 1

Plate 1001 A 1

Page 173: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Defining numbering seriesNumbering the model 173

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. If you are modifying the properties of a concrete part, go to the Cast unit tab.3. Under Numbering series, define a part prefix and a start number.4. Click Modify.

See also Assigning a numbering series to an assembly (173)

Defining numbering series (171)

Assigning a numbering series to an assemblyTo assign a numbering series to an assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.2. Double-click an assembly to open the assembly properties dialog box.3. On the Assembly tab, define an assembly prefix and a start number.4. Click Modify.

See also Assigning a numbering series to a part (172)

Defining numbering series (171)

Family numbersWith family numbering you can group objects within the same numbering series into different “families”. This can be used, for example, to find similar cast units that can be cast in the same bed.

When you use family numbering, the cast unit position numbers consist of a family number and a qualifier. For example:

Assemblies and cast units that match the comparison criteria you define in the Numbering Setup dialog box get the same family number. However, if they have the same family number but different part geometry or materials, they get unique qualifier numbers.

See also Defining numbering series (171)

Assigning family numbers (173)

Changing the family number of an object (174)

Example: Using family numbers (185)

Assigning family numbersTo assign family numbers to numbering series:

Family number

Qualifier

Page 174: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 174

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup dialog box.

2. Go to the Family numbering tab.3. Define which numbering series to assign family numbers to.

a Click Add series to open the Add series dialog box.Tekla Structures displays all the assembly and cast unit numbering series in the model.

b Select a numbering series from the list, and then click Add.The numbering series appears in the family numbering list.

4. Under Compare, select the properties that need to be identical for the members of the same family.Define comparison criteria for each numbering series separately.

Select at least one check box, but not all of them. If you select all the check boxes, the family number will be the same as the normal assembly position, and the qualifier number will be 1 for all. If you do not select any check boxes, only one family number per series is assigned.

5. Click Apply.Tekla Structures stores the settings in the numbering database file (<model_name>.db2) in the current model folder the next time you save the model.

6. If you are assigning family numbers to parts that have already been numbered, clear the existing numbers.

7. Update numbering in the model.Tekla Structures assigns a family number to all objects in the numbering series.

See also Family numbers (173)

Clearing numbers (182)

Changing the family number of an objectTo change the family number and/or family qualifier of an object:

1. Select the objects whose family numbers you want to change.2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number > Family Number...3. In the Assign Family Number dialog box, type the desired values in the Family number and

Family qualifier fields. 4. Click Assign.

See also Family numbers (173)

Overlapping numbering seriesWhen you plan numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If a series overlaps another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts.

Tekla Structures warns you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap.

See also Defining numbering series (171)

Viewing the numbering history (184)

Overlapping part/assembly series

9.4 Numbering objectsTo number objects in a model:

Page 175: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 175

1. Optional: Modify the numbering settings.a Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the

Numbering Setup dialog box.b Modify the settings.c Click Apply or OK.

2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering and select one of the following commands:

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See also Numbering settings (292)

Numbering assemblies and cast units (175)

Numbering reinforcements (176)

Saving preliminary numbers (176)

Control numbers (176)

Changing numbers (182)

Clearing numbers (182)

Creating a standard-part model (183)

Example: Numbering identical beams (185)

Numbering assemblies and cast unitsPart numbering does not affect cast unit and assembly numbering. However, Tekla Structures numbers assemblies and cast units in the same way as it does parts. The default start number is 1. The prefix varies based on the part type.

Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies, if you select the Surface treatment check box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Assembly position numbers (175)

Assembly position numbersUse the options in the Numbering Setup dialog box to sort the order in which assemblies are given their position numbers. Sorting by user-defined attributes or by location does not affect the part position.

The sort order can be based on the following criteria:

• The x, y or z coordinates of the main part of the assemblyThe sorting is based on the center of gravity of the reference axis.

• The user-defined attribute of an assembly or the main part

Assembly and cast unit numbering may affect part numbering, if the advanced option XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.

Page 176: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 176

If your sorting is based on user-defined attributes, Tekla Structures displays a list box that includes all the available user-defined attributes.

See also Numbering assemblies and cast units (175)

Numbering reinforcementsTekla Structures numbers reinforcements in the same way as it does parts.

Reinforcements may affect the numbering of parts and cast units. To force Tekla Structures to give otherwise identical concrete parts and cast units different numbers if they have different reinforcements, select the Reinforcing bars check box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.

Part numbering and cast unit numbering do not affect the numbering of reinforcements.

See also Identical reinforcements (171)

Reinforcement

Saving preliminary numbersA preliminary mark is a user-defined attribute that defines the part position number. You can save the current part position numbers as preliminary marks for selected parts. The previous preliminary numbers are overriden.

To save part position numbers for preliminary marks:

1. Select the parts.2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Save Preliminary Numbers.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Control numbersControl numbers are additional numbers that can be used to identify parts in a model. Use control numbers if you need to give additional, unique numbers to assemblies or cast units, regardless of their position numbers.

Control numbers can be useful, for example, when delivering a large number of similar wall elements to the site. To successfully pack and unpack the load, you need to plan the order of the wall elements already when the order is shipped. Although all of the wall elements may have the same cast unit position number, you can assign a unique control number to each individual wall element.

Contents Assigning control numbers to parts (177)

Displaying control numbers in the model (178)

Removing control numbers (179)

Locking and unlocking control numbers (179)

Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order (180)

Control number settings (294)

If you add new parts, objects that have already been numbered are not renumbered to suit the sorting order by, for example, the x coordinate. In this case you should renumber the parts.

Page 177: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 177

Assigning control numbers to partsTo assign control numbers to parts:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open the Create control numbers dialog box.

2. Indicate which parts to assign control numbers to.• To number the entire model, do not select any parts.

• To only number specific parts, select the parts you want to number.

3. If you want to assign control numbers only to parts in a specific numbering series:a In the Numbering list, select By numbering serie.b Enter the prefix and start number in the corresponding boxes.

4. Define the control numbers to be used.a In the Start number of control numbers box, enter the first control number to be

used.b In the Step value box, define the control number interval.

For example, to assign the control numbers 2, 5, 8, 11, and so on, enter 2 in the Start number of control numbers box and 3 in the Step value box.

5. Use the Renumber list to specify how to treat parts that already have control numbers.• Select No to keep the existing control numbers.• Select Yes to replace the existing control numbers with new ones.

6. Use the First direction, Second direction, and Third direction lists to define the order of control numbers.

7. Click Apply to save the changes.8. Click Create to number the parts.

See also Control number order (177)

Control number settings (294)

Control number orderWhen you assign control numbers, you must define in what order to assign them. The order is based on the location of each part on the global coordinate system. The options are:

• None• X• Y• Z• -X• -Y• -Z

With positive directions (X, Y, and Z), the parts with the lowest coordinate value are numbered first. With negative directions (-X, -Y, and -Z), the parts with the highest coordinate value are numbered first.

For example, if the first direction is X, the second direction is Y, and the third direction is Z, numbering starts from the parts that have the lowest x coordinate value. If multiple parts have the same x coordinate, also their y coordinates are compared. If multiple parts have the same x and y coordinates, also their z coordinates are compared.

Example In the following example, the first direction is X and the second direction is Y. The numbers 1–8 indicate the control numbers.

Page 178: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 178

See also Assigning control numbers to parts (177)

Displaying control numbers in the modelIf the control numbers are not displayed in the model, you can set them visible using the display settings.

To display control numbers in the model:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.2. Click Display… and go to the Advanced tab.3. Select the Part label check box.4. In the Properties list, select User-defined attributes, and then click Add.

The Part label dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter ACN and click OK.The property is moved to the Part label list.

6. Click Modify.The control numbers are displayed in the model, right after the part position numbers.

Example In the following example, the numbers 1–8 indicate the control numbers.

Page 179: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 179

See also Control numbers (176)

Removing control numbersIf needed, you can remove existing control numbers from all or some of the parts. Do not remove control numbers unless you are absolutely sure that they are no longer needed.

To remove existing control numbers:

1. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click User-defined attributes...

The current control number of the part is displayed on the Parameters tab, next to the Control Number box. For example:

3. Remove the existing control number from the box.4. Click Modify to apply the change.

See also Control numbers (176)

Locking and unlocking control numbersTo prevent other users from changing the control numbers of some or all of the parts in the model, use the Lock/Unlock Control Numbers command. Later on, if the control numbers need to be changed, you can use the same command for unlocking the numbers.

To lock or unlock control numbers:

Removing of control numbers is different than reassigning of control numbers. If you only want to reassign new control numbers to parts that already have control numbers, use the Renumber option in the Create control numbers dialog box.

Page 180: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 180

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Lock/Unlock Control Numbers to open the Lock/Unlock control numbers dialog box.

2. Define which parts’ control numbers to lock or unlock.• To lock or unlock the control numbers of all parts, do not select any parts in the model.

• To lock or unlock the control numbers of specific parts only, select the parts in the model.

3. In the Status list, select Lock or Unlock.4. Click Apply to save the changes.5. Click Create to lock or unlock the numbers.

See also Control numbers (176)

Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order This example shows how to assign control numbers to six concrete walls. As four of these walls have the same cast unit position, you cannot make a clear distinction between the cast units based on their position number. That is why each wall will get a unique identifier that indicates their erection order at the site. The erection order also affects the order of shipping. For example, the wall number 1 needs to be shipped on top of the delivery, because it will be erected first on the site; the wall number 2 should be the second on the bundle, because it will be erected next; and so on.

The following image represents the desired end result.

Erected as 1st

Erected as 2nd

Page 181: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 181

To assign control numbers to the concrete walls:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open the Create control numbers dialog box.

2. Select the six concrete walls.3. Define that you want to assign control numbers only to parts in the numbering series S with the

start number 1.a In the Numbering list, select By numbering serie.b In the Prefix box, enter S.c In the Start number box, enter 1.

4. Define that you want to use the numbers 1–6 as the control numbers for these concrete walls.a In the Start number of control numbers box, enter 1.b In the Step value box, enter 1.

5. Define that you want to first number the walls with identical z coordinates in the order they appear in the positive x axis.

a In the First direction list, select Z.b In the Second direction list, select X.

6. Click Apply to save the changes.7. Click Create to number the concrete walls.

Each concrete wall gets a unique control number, as shown in the following image.

Erected as 3rd

Erected as 4th

Erected as 5th

Erected as 6th

If you cannot see the control numbers in the model, modfy the display settings. For more information on the required settings, see Displaying control numbers in the model (178).

Page 182: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 182

Changing numbersUse the Change Number command to change part, assembly, multi-position, or family numbers after you run numbering. All objects with the same number will be given the number you specified. This command does not change the numbering series.

To change the position numbers:

1. Select an object. 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number and select one of the commands.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

3. Set the desired properties. The options you have vary depending on your selection in step 2. If the number you specified is already in use, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not change the number.Tekla Structures also displays a warning if the position number is higher than the highest current number. This is for information only and the number is still changed.

4. Click Assign.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Clearing numbersUse the Clear Numbers command to permanently delete the assigned position numbers of objects. Next time you run numbering, Tekla Structures assigns new numbers to the objects, irrespective of what their previous numbers were.

Page 183: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering objectsNumbering the model 183

To clear the position numbers:

1. Select the objects whose numbers you want to clear.2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Clear Numbers and select one of the commands.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Creating a standard-part modelA standard-part model contains only standard parts with specific part prefixes. You can have Tekla Structures use these prefixes when numbering parts in another model.

To create a standard-part model:

1. Create a new model and give it a descriptive name.For example, StandardParts.

2. Create the objects you want to have as standard parts. 3. Explode all components.4. Delete all unnecessary items.5. Give the objects prefixes that are not used elsewhere (for example, STD1, STD2, and so on).

Ensure that the standard-part model does not contain duplicate prefixes.

6. Save the standard-part model.7. Open another model.8. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Numbering.9. Check that the advanced option XS_STD_PART_MODEL is set, and that it points to the correct

standard-part model.For example:

XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\StandardParts

10. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to display the Numbering Setup dialog box.

11. If you have selected the Part name check box, ensure that the project model has the same part names as the standard-part model.

12. Click Check for standard parts and Apply.13. Number the model.

As Tekla Structures carries out the numbering, it compares all of the parts in the model to the standard-part model. The numbering applies any part position numbers (only the part prefix) found in the standard-part model to all identical parts found in the project model.

See also Numbering objects (174)

This functionality only applies to steel parts.

Page 184: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Viewing the numbering historyNumbering the model 184

9.5 Viewing the numbering historyTo view the numbering history:

• Click Tools > Display Log File > Numbering History....

Tekla Structures displays the numbering log file.

See also Numbering objects (174)

9.6 Repairing numbering errorsWe recommend that you check and repair numbering in the model every now and then, especially before producing drawings or reports.

To check and repair numbering in a model:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup dialog box.

2. Ensure that one of the following options is being used:• Compare to old• Keep number if possible

3. Click OK to save the changes.4. Unless you want to repair the entire model, select the objects whose numbering you want to

repair.5. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model and select one of the following commands:

• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: All• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: Series of Selected Objects

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See also Numbering objects (174)

Changing numbers (182)

For information on how to interpret the log file, see Numbering history log.

Tekla Structures assigns the position number of the oldest part or assembly to all identical parts, even if a newer part or assembly has a smaller position number.

To force a certain position number on a part or assembly, use the Change Number command after repairing numbering in the model.

Page 185: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering examplesNumbering the model 185

9.7 Numbering examplesThis section gives some examples of numbering the model.

Contents Example: Numbering identical beams (185)

Example: Using family numbers (185)

Example: Numbering selected part types (186)

Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (187)

Example: Numbering settings during a project (188)

Example: Numbering identical beamsThis example explains how different numbering settings result in different part numbers when you modify a part.

To number identical beams:

1. Create three identical beams with the numbering series prefix P and start number 1.2. Number the model. All the beams have the part position number P1.3. Modify one of the beams. 4. Number the model. You should now have two beams P1 and one P2.5. Change beam P2 to be identical to the others.6. Number the model.

Depending on the numbering settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box, Tekla Structures assigns one of the following part position numbers to the modified part:

• Compare to old: P1• Keep number if possible: P2

• Take new number: P3

See also Numbering objects (174)

Example: Using family numbersIn this example, the following four beams have the numbering series prefix B and the start number 1. The parts have the same main profile, and each pair has the same length, but the holes are different.

Page 186: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering examplesNumbering the model 186

We use the following family numbering settings:

• Numbering series: B/1• Compare: Main part profile and Overall length

With the given family numbering criteria, Tekla Structures divides the beams into two families. All beams have the same profile, but each pair has a different length. Within both families the beams get different qualifiers because they have different holes.

• The first beam gets the assembly position number B/1-1

• The second beam gets the assembly position number B/1-2• The third beam gets the assembly position number B/2-1

• The fourth beam gets the assembly position number B/2-2

See also Family numbers (173)

Example: Numbering selected part typesThis example shows how different numbering settings can be used for different part types. We will use one set of numbering settings for steel anchor rods, and another one for steel columns.

To number anchor rods and columns:

1. Create steel columns.2. Create anchor rods with the numbering series prefix AR and start number 1.

Ensure that this numbering series is different to any other parts or assemblies in the model.

3. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup dialog box.

4. Ensure that the Column orientation check box is not selected, and then click Apply.

Assembly position: B/1

Assembly position: B/2

Assembly position: B/3

Assembly position: B/4

Page 187: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering examplesNumbering the model 187

5. Select one of the anchor rods in the model.6. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All parts with the AR prefix and start number at 1 are numbered.

7. After the anchor rod numbering is complete, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

8. Select the Column orientation check box, and then click Apply.9. Select one of the steel columns in the model.10. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All columns belonging to the same numbering series as the selected column are numbered.

Example: Numbering parts in selected phasesThis example shows how to number a model that consists of multiple phases, each phase having a different detailing and submittal schedule. This enables you to release drawings for a particular phase at any time.

Before you start, divide the model into phases.

To number parts in selected phases:

1. Apply a specific numbering series prefix and start number for parts in each phase.For example:

• The beams in phase 1 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 1000.• The beams in phase 2 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 2000.

Page 188: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering examplesNumbering the model 188

2. Ensure that the numbering series are not overlapping.For example, to avoid numbering overlaps with the beams in phase 2, phase 1 should not contain more than 1000 position numbers.

3. Select the parts you want to number.

4. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup dialog box.

5. Modify the numbering settings, and then click Apply.6. Select one of the parts you want to number.7. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All parts belonging to the same numbering series as the selected part are numbered.

See also Example: Numbering settings during a project (188)

Example: Numbering settings during a projectYou can use different numbering settings at different times in a project. For example:

• Before releasing a phase of the project for fabrication, you might use the Re-use old numbers option for numbering the entire model.

• If a phase has already been released for fabrication in a project, you might use the Take new number option for new and modified parts.

• If you are numbering other phases of the project at earlier stages of detailing, you might use the Compare to old option and try to combine as many position numbers as possible.

See also Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (187)

General numbering settings (292)

Phase 1: green

Phase 2: magenta

Use selection filters to easily select parts belonging to a certain phase or parts with a specific start number series. You can also use selection filters to ignore specific phases that are already completed or phases that are not ready for numbering.

Page 189: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Organizing the modelAdvanced modeling 189

10 Advanced modeling

This section explains some advanced modeling techniques available in Tekla Structures.

Contents • Organizing the model (189)• Phases (194)

• Sequences (195)

• Lotting (197)• Parametric modeling (199)

• Sketched cross sections (229)

10.1 Organizing the modelModel Organizer is a tool for efficient construction management and planning.

With Model Organizer you can classify your model into several areas, and the objects in the model into appropriate object type categories. The areas and object types can, for example, be the same as your building schedules, lots, and erection sequences.

You can classify the model as follows:

• Logical areasYou can create projects, sites and buildings under logical areas. There can be several sites in a project and several buildings in a site. Buildings can be further divided into sections and storys. A section is a part of a building, for example, the east wing and the west wing of a building could be such sections. Astory is a floor in a building, for example, the first floor could be story 1.

• Object types

You can create categories for object types in your model. Such object type categories could be, for example, beams, columns, and footings. Under each category, you can create more detailed categories according to your needs. Both nativeTekla Structures objects and reference model objects can be categorized.

An object in the model can belong to one section and one story, for example, a certain footing can be on a certain floor only. By contrast, the same object can be in more than one object type category. You can, for example, have the same footing in several footing categories. The categories could be based on the footing type, location in the model, and the supplier.

Page 190: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Organizing the modelAdvanced modeling 190

See also Creating logical areas (191)

Creating object type categories (191)

Modifying logical areas and object type categories (191)

Modifying the object pane (192)

Classifying objects in object type categories (193)

You can use all Model Organizer functions in the Full and Construction Management configurations.

In other Tekla Structures configurations, you can view the created logical areas and object type categories, and for example show and hide them in your model.

Construction Management module offers the same functionality as the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the Construction Management module for any modeling configuration. The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager, and Clash Check Manager functions.

Page 191: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Organizing the modelAdvanced modeling 191

Viewing logical areas and object type categories (193)

Deleting logical areas and object type categories (194)

Creating logical areasLogical areas may already have been defined for the model. You can create new logical areas for your own needs.

To create logical areas using Model Organizer:

1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....2. Create a path structure.

a Right-click Logical Areas.b Click New Building.c Click New Section. d Click New Story.

You may create as many sections and storys as you need. Note that sections and storys are both created under buildings.

3. Select a section or story in Model Organizer.4. In the model, select the area for the section or the story.

Each model object can belong to only one section and one story.

5. In Model Organizer, right-click the selected section or story, and select Add Selected to Category.

See also Organizing the model (189)

Creating object type categoriesObject types may already have been defined for the model. You can create new object type categories for your own needs.

To create object type categories using Model Organizer:

1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....2. Create object type categories.

a Right-click Object Types.b Click New Object Type or New Object Type for Assemblies.

You can also create subtypes for object types.

3. In the model, select the objects you want to add to an object type category.4. In Model Organizer, right-click the object type category and select Add Selected to Category .

See also Organizing the model (189)

Modifying logical areas and object type categoriesTo modify logical areas or object type categories, do any of the following:

In large projects, you can create sites for your project by right-clicking Logical Areas and selecting Show Site(s). You can hide the sites by selecting Hide Site(s).

Page 192: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Organizing the modelAdvanced modeling 192

See also Organizing the model (189)

Modifying the object paneYou can define for each object type category which properties are shown in the object pane. The properties you can add are listed in the ModelOrganizerProperties.xml file located in the model folder.

To modify the object pane:

1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....2. Select an object type category.3. Right-click and select Customize object properties.4. Select the properties for the object pane. You can map more than one report property to a

property.

To Do this

Rename logical areas and object type categories

Right-click the name in Model Organizer and select Rename.

Redefine a logical area 1. Select the new area in the model.2. Right-click the area name in Model Organizer

and select Add Selected to Category.

Change the type of object type categories

1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Right-click and select Set category for assemblies or Set category for all objects, depending on the current category type.

Copy categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Right-click and select Copy.3. Go to another location, right-click and select

Paste.

Move categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Drag the category to another location.

Add objects 1. Select the objects in the model.2. Right-click the category name in Model

Organizer and select Add Selected to Category.

Move objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects you want to move.

3. Drag the objects to another category.

Remove objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects you want to remove.

3. Right-click and select Remove from Category.

Page 193: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Organizing the modelAdvanced modeling 193

Select or unselect more than one property using the Ctrl or Shift key, right-click and select Include selected or Exclude selected.

5. Optional: Click to load a file containing properties.

6. Optional: Click to add a new row and enter the property information.

7. Optional: Add reference model properties.a Copy the properties you want to add from the Inquire object dialog box.

Remember to copy all the information of a property.

b Right-click in the Properties dialog box in Model Organizer.c Select Paste external properties.

The property is shown as an external property.

8. Click OK.

See also Organizing the model (189)

Classifying objects in object type categoriesYou can classify the objects in an object type category based on the properties of the category. The properties of a category are defined in the Properties dialog box and shown in the object pane.

To classify objects:

1. Click Tools > Model Organizer...2. Select an object type category.3. Right-click and select Classify objects based on property.4. Select a property from the list.

Model Organizer creates subcategories for the selected property under the object type category.

See also Organizing the model (189)

Modifying the object pane (192)

Viewing logical areas and object type categoriesTo view logical areas and object type categories in the model, do any of the following:

If the object pane is not visible, click . To open the Properties

dialog box, click .

Page 194: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

PhasesAdvanced modeling 194

See also Organizing the model (189)

Deleting logical areas and object type categoriesTo delete a logical area or an object type category using Model Organizer:

1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....2. Select a category under Logical Areas or Object Types.3. Right-click and select Delete.4. Click OK to confirm.

See also Organizing the model (189)

10.2 PhasesUse phases to break up a model into sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models, according to their phase number.

To Do this

View a logical area or objects belonging to an object type category

Select the logical area or the object type category.

The logical area or objects belonging to the selected object type category are highlighted in the model.

View more than one logical area or object type category at a time

Hold down the Ctrl key and select the logical areas and object type categories you want to view.

View only the objects belonging the selected category

Right-click a logical area or an object type category and select Show Only Selected.

To show all objects again, right-click the category and select Redraw View.

Hide the objects belonging to the selected category

Right-click a logical area or an object type category and select Hide.

To show all objects again, right-click the category and select Redraw View.

View the classification information of an object

Right-click the object in the model and select Model Classification > Show Related Classification

or

in Model Organizer select an object and click .

Filter objects in logical areas and in object type categories

Create a selection filter. Select the Object types category in the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box. Use the Entity name property to filter the objects by their name in logical areas and in object type categories. You can also use the Category name property to filter the objects by their name in object type categories.

Page 195: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

SequencesAdvanced modeling 195

For example, you might have a large project which several users work on simultaneously in single-user mode. First create a basic model that includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You then copy this basic model to all users.

Each user then works on a separate part of the building. When a part of the model is completed, you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc.).

See also Dividing the model into phases (195)

Custom phase properties (195)

Dividing the model into phasesTo divide a model into phases:

1. Click Tools > Phase Manager.... The Phase Manager dialog box appears.

2. Click Add to create new phases.3. Click Set current to make the selected phase the current phase.

From now on, Tekla Structures assigns all objects you create to the current phase. The @ character in front of the phase number indicates the current phase.

4. Divide the model into phases.a To identify the phase of an object, select an object and click Phases by objects.

Tekla Structures selects the phase of the object.

b To see which objects belong to a certain phase, select a phase from the list and then click Objects by phases.Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding objects in the model.

c To change the phase of one or more objects, select the objects, select a phase from the list, and then click Modify phase.

5. Click OK to save your changes.

See also Phases (194)

Custom phase propertiesYou can add custom phase properties, which will appear as extra columns in the Phase Manager dialog box.

Define the names of phase properties in the objects.inp file. To use phase properties in reports and templates, use the syntax PHASE.ATTRIBUTE_NAME in the phase property field name.

See also Phases (194)

10.3 SequencesUse the Sequencer tool to name sequences and assign incremental numbers to parts. For example, you can define the order in which to erect parts by creating erection sequences. You can define several sequences for different purposes, and a part can belong to several sequences at the same time.

Sequencer works by assigning a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part. The sequence name that you enter in the Sequencer Properties dialog box is the name of the user-defined attribute defined in the objects.inp file.

Limitations Sequencer does not work for objects that are inside a reference model.

Page 196: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

SequencesAdvanced modeling 196

See also Creating a sequence (196)

Adding parts to a sequence (196)

Checking the sequence of a part (197)

Modifying the sequence number of a part (197)

Deleting a sequence (197)

Creating a sequenceUse the Sequencer tool to assign sequence numbers to parts. If you want to view and modify the sequence number afterwards, you must first create a user-defined attribute to which you assign sequence numbers.

To create a new sequence:

1. Create a user-defined attribute to which you assign sequence numbers.a Open the objects.inp file in any standard text editor.b In the Part attributes section, add a new user-defined attribute.

The value_type must be integer, and the field_format must be %d.

For example:

attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0",

"0.0")

c Save the file.d Restart Tekla Structures.

2. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.3. Type a name for the sequence. Use exactly the same name as in the objects.inp file.

For example, MY_INFO_1.

4. Click Apply.5. Select the parts you want to include in the sequence.

The first part gets the sequence number 1, the second part number 2, and so on.

If you select a part that has already been included in the sequence, Tekla Structures asks if you want to override the existing number. If you click Yes, Tekla Structures gives the next available number to the part.

6. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.

See also Sequences (195)

Adding parts to a sequenceTo add parts to an existing sequence:

1. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.2. Select a sequence name from the list.3. Click OK or Apply.4. Select the parts you want to add to the sequence.5. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.

You cannot add new parts to a sequence, unless the new part is at the end of the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must redefine the whole sequence.

Page 197: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

LottingAdvanced modeling 197

See also Sequences (195)

Checking the sequence of a partYou can check the sequence name and number of a part by using the Inquire tool.

To check the sequence of a part:

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.2. Select a part.

Tekla Structures displays the properties of the part. The sequence name and number are displayed under More. For example:

See also Sequences (195)

Modifying the sequence number of a partBefore you start, assign a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part.

To modify the sequence number of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click User-defined attributes...

The current sequence number is displayed next to the user-defined attribute to which you assigned the sequence number. For example, MY_INFO_1.

3. Modify the sequence number.4. Click Modify.

See also Sequences (195)

Deleting a sequenceTo delete a sequence:

1. Click Tools > Sequencer....2. Select a sequence name from the list.3. Click Delete and then click Yes.

See also Sequences (195)

10.4 LottingWith lots you can group assemblies for transporting to site. Lotting means that you evaluate specific model parts with respect to the number of units that can be carried by a transfer vehicle. For example, you can calculate how many concrete truck deliveries are needed to pour the footings or slabs for a specific portion of the model. With this information, it is easier to determine area requirements and create an erection schedule.

When you define lots, you must take into account the load-carrying capacity of the vehicle, because a lot cannot exceed the maximum total load capacity. You can calculate truck load sizes based on material weights and model quantities. For most model parts, the weight is based on the size, length, and material of the part.

Page 198: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

LottingAdvanced modeling 198

You can use lotting in conjunction with the Sequencer tool. For example, you can load each part of the model onto a specific truck based on the erection sequence of the part.

The basic lotting process is the same for steel and concrete parts. However, if you are using cast-in-place concrete, remember that the concrete is transported in a volumetric container (for example, in a ten-cubic-yard truck). In that case, you must calculate the weight-carrying capacity of the concrete vehicle before defining the number of lots.

See also Creating a lot (198)

Adding parts to a lot (198)

Removing parts from a lot (199)

Deleting a lot (199)

Sequences (195)

Creating a lotTo create a lot:

1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Click Properties... to display the Lot Properties dialog box.3. Enter a name in the box at the bottom of the dialog box.4. Enter a lot number in the Number box.5. Enter the maximum weight of the lot in the Max weight box.6. Click Add.

Tekla Structures creates an empty lot with the defined properties.

See also Lotting (197)

Adding parts to a lotAfter you have created the needed lots, you must select each part of the model and assign them to a lot until the total load weight of the lot reaches the specified target.

To add parts to a lot:

1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Select an existing lot from the list.

Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot. The total weight of the lot and the number of assemblies it contains are displayed under Applied values.

3. Hold down Shift and select the parts that you want to add to the lot. 4. Click Apply selected.

The weight and number of the added parts is displayed under Current values. Tekla Structures displays a warning message if the weight limit of the lot is exceeded.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box.When you re-open the dialog box, the Applied values include the weight and number of the parts you added.

To view the properties of a part, right-click the part and then select Inquire > Part or Properties...

Page 199: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 199

See also Lotting (197)

Removing parts from a lotTo remove parts from a lot:

1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Select an existing lot from the list.

Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot.

3. Hold down Ctrl and select the parts you want to remove from the lot. Tekla Structures deselects the parts.

4. Click Apply selected.5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

See also Lotting (197)

Deleting a lotTo delete a lot:

1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Click Properties...3. Select an existing lot from the list.4. Click Delete.

See also Lotting (197)

10.5 Parametric modelingTekla Structures models are parametric, which means that each model object has parameters that define various properties, including its geometry, location and relationship to other parts.

You can use these parameters to:

• Create variables that define the properties of the model object, such as a beam or column.Variables can define fixed properties, such as the name of a column. They can also include formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value each time you use the model object.

• Create dependencies, or relationships, between model objects, so the properties of one model object adjust if you change the related model object.

For example, you might create a dependency that offsets a column a fixed distance from a plane on a wall, so that when you move the wall, the column follows.

See also Defining variables

Creating distance variables

Creating reference distances

Always use the Shift key when adding parts to an existing lot. If you simply select parts, you will overwrite the contents of the lot. When you hold down Shift, you cannot select parts that already belong to another lot.

Page 200: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 200

Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures (200)

Parametric profiles available in Tekla StructuresThis section introduces the parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures.

Contents I profiles (200)

I beams (steel) (201)

L profiles (201)

Z profiles (201)

U profiles (202)

C profiles (202)

T profiles (203)

Welded box profiles (204)

Box profiles (206)

WQ profiles (207)

Rectangular sections (207)

Circular sections (207)

Rectangular hollow sections (207)

Circular hollow sections (208)

Cold rolled profiles (208)

Folded plates (211)

Hat profiles (217)

I beams (concrete) (218)

Ledger beams (concrete) (219)

T profiles (concrete) (220)

Irregular beams (concrete) (221)

Panels (223)

Variable cross sections (226)

Others (228)

I profiles

HIh-s-t*b (symmetric)

HIh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2

HIh1-h2-s-t*b

HIh1-h2-s-t1*b1-t2*b2

Page 201: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 201

I beams (steel)

L profiles

Z profiles

I_BLT_Ah-b1-s1-t1*h2-b2-s2-t2

I_BLT_B h*b1*t1*s-b2*t2

I_HEMh*b*c*s*t

I_VAR_Ah1-ht*b1-bt*s*t

Lh*b*t

Zh*b*t

Page 202: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 202

U profiles

C profiles

Z_VAR_Ah1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3

Z_VAR_Bh1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3

Z_VAR_C h1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3

Uh*b*t

Ch*b*t

C_BUILTh*b*s*t

Page 203: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 203

T profiles

C_VAR_Ah1*b1-s-h2*b2

C_VAR_Bh1*b1-s-h2*b2

C_VAR_Ch1*b1-s-h2*b2

C_VAR_Dh-b-d-c-s

Th-s-t-b

Page 204: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 204

Welded box profiles

Welded beam profiles

HK h-s-t*b-c

HKh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

B_WLD_A h*b*s*t

B_WLD_B h*b*s*t

B_WLD_C h*s

B_WLD_D h*b*s*t

B_WLD_E h*b*s*t

Page 205: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 205

B_WLD_F h*b*s*[t]

B_WLD_G h*b*s*t*a

B_WLD_H h*bo*bu*s*to*tu

B_WLD_I h*bo*s*to*bu*tu*a

B_WLD_J h1/h2*b*s*t

B_WLD_K h1/h2*b*s*t

Page 206: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 206

Box profiles

B_WLD_L h*wt*wb*s*tt*tb

B_BUILTh*b*s*t

B_VAR_Ah1-h2*t

B_VAR_Bh1-h2*t

B_VAR_Ch1-h2*t

Page 207: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 207

WQ profiles

Rectangular sections

Circular sections

Rectangular hollow sections

HQh-s-t1*t2*b2

HQh*s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

PLh*b

h=height

b=thickness

(smaller=b)

Dd

ELDd1*r1*d2*r2

Ph*t (symmetric)

Ph*b*t

Page 208: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 208

Circular hollow sections

Cold rolled profiles

Ph1*b1-h2*b2*t

PDd

PDd1*d2*t

EPDd1*r1*d2*r2*t

ZZh-t-e-b (symmetric)

ZZh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2

CCh-t-e-b (symmetric)

CCh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2

Page 209: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 209

CW h-t-e-b-f-h1 (symmetric)

CW h-t-e1*b1-f1-f2-e2*b2

CUh-t-h1-b-e (symmetric)

CUh-t-h1-b1-h2-b2-e

EBh-t-e-b-a

EBh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a

Reference points:1=right

2=left

3=top

BFh-s-b-h1

SPDd*t

SPDd2*d2*t

ESPD d1-d2*t

Page 210: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 210

ECh-t-e-b-a

ECh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a

EDh-t-b-e-h1-h2-f1-f2-a

EEh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a

EFh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2/h1-a

EZh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a

Page 211: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 211

Folded plates

EWh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2-h2-h1-a

FFLAa-b-t

FPANBh-b-t

FPANB_-b-t

FPANBAh-b-t

FPANBA_h-b-t

FPANBBh-c-d-t

FPANCVb-c-d-t

FPANGh-b-c-t

Page 212: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 212

FPANGAh-b-c-t

FPANJa-b-c-t

FPANJa-b-c-t

FPAN a-b-c-t-g

FPANVVa-b-c-t-g

FP_Ah-b-c-d-g

Page 213: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 213

FP_AAh*b2*t*a

FP_Bh-b-c-d-g-i

FP_BBh-b-d

FP_Cb-h-c

FP_CCh-b-a-d-s

FP_Db-h-c-d-f-g-i-j-s

Page 214: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 214

FP_Eb-h-c-d-f-g-s

FP_Fb-h-c-d-f-g-s

FP_Gb-h-c-d-f-g-s

FP_Hb-h-c-d-f-s

FP_Ib-h-c-d-f-s

FP_Jb-h-c-d-a

Page 215: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 215

FP_Kb-h-c-d

FP_Lb-h-c-d-f-s

FP_Mb-h-c-d-s

FP_Nb-h-c-d

FP_Ob-h-c-d-s

FP_Pa1*a2*h-b1*b2-Alpha1-Alpha2-Beta1-Beta2-s

Page 216: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 216

FP_Qb-h-c-d-s

FP_Rb-h-c-d

FP_Sb-h-c-s

FP_Tb-h-a-d-s

FP_Ub-h-a-d-s

FP_Vb-h-s-c

Page 217: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 217

Hat profiles

FP_Wb-h-a-d-s

FP_WWh-b-a-c-s

FP_Yh-b-c-d

FP_Zd-h-b-s-a-f

HAT h*a*c*t

Page 218: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 218

I beams (concrete)

HATCa-b-c-b1-h-b3-b4-b5-s

HATAb1*h1*h2*h3*h4*h5*h6*b2*t*f*a*h*b

HATBb*b1*b2*h*h1*h2*h3*h4*t*f*a

HIIh1*b1*t1-h2-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]

IIh*b1*t1-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]

Page 219: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 219

Ledger beams (concrete)

SIIh1*b1*t1-h2-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]

RCLs*h-b*t

RCDLs*h-b*t

RCDLs*h-b*t1*t2

RCDXs*h-b*h2*h1

RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1

RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1-ex

RCXXs*h-b*t*h1-h2-ex

RCXs*h-b*h2*h1

Page 220: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 220

T profiles (concrete)

HTTh*b-s-t-b2-h2

TCh-b-t-s

TRIh*b-b2*t1-h3-t2

TTh*b-s-t-b2

TTTh*b-bl-br-hw-bwmin-bwmax

T_VAR_Ah1*h2*s*b1*t1-sft

Page 221: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 221

Irregular beams (concrete)

T_VAR_Bh-b-c-d

IRR_Ab-h-g-c-d

IRR_Bh-b-c-d-f-g

IRR_Ch-b-c-d

IRR_Db1*b2-h1*h2

IRR_Eh-b-c-d-h2-h3-h4

Page 222: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 222

OCTB*b1-H*h1

REC_Ah-b

REC_Bh-b-b1

REC_Ch-b-b1

REC_Dh-b-b2

REC_Eh-b

REC_Fh-b

REC_Gh-b

Page 223: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 223

Panels

REC_Hh-b

REC_I a-b*h

TRI_Ah-b

TRI_Ba1

TRI_Cb-h

PNL_Ah*b

PNL_Bh*b

Page 224: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 224

PNL_Ch*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Dh*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Eh*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Fh*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Gh*b

PNL_Hh*b-a-ht

Page 225: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 225

PNL_Ih*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Jh*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Kh*b

PNL_Lh-b-c-f

PNL_Mh-b-c-f-d

PNL_Nh-b-d-f-g-j

PNL_Oh-b-d-f-g-i-t

Page 226: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 226

Variable cross sections

HEXRECTh-b-br-hr

HXGONb

OBLINCLh1-h2-h3-h4-b

OBLRIDh1*b1*b2-h2-h3-l2-l1

OBLVAR_Ah1*b1*b2-h2

OBLVAR_Bh1-h2-b

OBLVAR_Ch-b-a-i-j-k-m-n

Page 227: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 227

OBLVAR_Dh-c-b

OBLVAR_Eh-b-a-c-d-i-j-k-l-m-p-o

OCTAGONb-b2

PRMDASh*b-he*be

PL_Vh*b-he*be

PRMDh*b-h2*b2

ROUNDRECTd-Rb*Rh-t*ye-ze

Page 228: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Parametric modelingAdvanced modeling 228

Others

BLKSd1-d2

CAPd

HEMISPHERd

NUT_Md

RCRWh*b-b2*b3-b4-t1*t2-t3*t4

SKh*b-h2-t-b2-b3

Page 229: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 229

10.6 Sketched cross sectionsThis section explains how to create and modify your own cross sections, and how to use them in a model.

The cross sections you create using the cross section sketch editor can be parametric or fixed. You can change the dimensions of parametric cross sections each time you use them in a model.

Contents Opening the cross section sketch editor (229)

Sketching the outline of a cross section (232)

Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Checking a sketched cross section (245)

Saving a sketched cross section (246)

Modifying a sketched cross section (246)

Using sketched cross sections in a model (249)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (250)

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section (251)

Opening the cross section sketch editorUse the cross section sketch editor to create and modify your own profile cross sections.

To open the cross section sketch editor:

1. Open a Tekla Structures model.2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section in Sketch Editor....

Tekla Structures opens the cross section sketch editor, the Sketch Browser, and the Variables dialog box.

SPHEREd

STBb-h-h1-b1-b2-d

STEPh-b*h1-b1-s

Page 230: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 230

See also Sketch Browser (230)

Variables (231)

Sketch BrowserThe Sketch Browser shows the objects (lines, arcs, circles, constraints, dimensions, and chamfers) of a cross section sketch in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Sketch Browser automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.

When you click an object in the cross section sketch editor, Tekla Structures highlights the object in the Sketch Browser, and vice versa.

Page 231: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 231

The Sketch Browser displays the following information about a cross section:

• Extrusion type (0, 1, or 2) and thickness of the sketch.

• Lines, arcs, and circles

• Constraints• Distances and dimensions and their values

• Chamfers and their type (0=None, 1=Line ... 7=Line and arc) and dimensions.

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (229)

Cross section extrusion types (248)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (112)

VariablesUse the Variables dialog box to define the properties of a sketched cross section. Variables can define fixed properties, or they can include formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value each time you use the profile in a model.

The Variables dialog box automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.

Page 232: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 232

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (229)

Variables properties

About variables

Sketching the outline of a cross sectionWhen you create a new cross section, start by sketching the outline and the holes of the cross section using lines, arcs, and circles.

Ensure that you create a closed shape, unless you are creating a cross section of a consistent thickness, such as a cold rolled section.

See also Sketching a polyline (232)

Sketching an arc (233)

Sketching a circle (233)

Sketching a polylineYou can create line segments in the cross section sketch editor by picking points. Tekla Structures automatically creates coincident constraints between the line segments and displays a chamfer symbol where line segments meet.

To sketch a polyline:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.2. Click the Sketch polyline icon:

3. Pick points to create each line segment.4. Click the middle mouse button to create the polyline.

The maximum number of points in a sketched cross section is 100.

Page 233: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 233

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (232)

Sketching an arcYou can create an arc in the cross section sketch editor by picking three points.

To sketch an arc:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.2. Click the Sketch arc icon:

3. Pick three points to define the arc.

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (232)

XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE

Sketching a circleYou can create a circle in the cross section sketch editor by picking two points.

To sketch a circle:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.2. Click the Sketch circle icon:

3. Pick a point to indicate the center of the circle (1).

You can use the advanced option XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE to define the smoothness of the arc.

Page 234: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 234

4. Pick a point to indicate the radius of the circle (2).

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (232)

Refining the shape of a sketched cross sectionAfter you have sketched the outline of a cross section, use constraints to refine your sketch and lock the shape. For example, you can straighten lines, create 90 degree angles, force lines to meet, close the shape, and add chamfers in corners.

To straighten the entire profile, use horizontal and vertical constraints in conjunction with other constraints. Although the shape is locked, you can still rotate the profile in the model.

See also Adding a parallel constraint (234)

Adding a perpendicular constraint (235)

Adding a coincident constraint (235)

Adding a fixed constraint (236)

Adding a horizontal constraint (236)

Adding a vertical constraint (237)

Deleting a constraint (237)

Adding a parallel constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to be parallel to each other.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a parallel constraint:

1. Click the Parallel constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch (1).3. Select another line in the sketch (2).

Page 235: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 235

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding a perpendicular constraintYou can force a line in a sketched cross section to be at a 90 degree angle to another line you select. The lines do not have to intersect.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a perpendicular constraint:

1. Click the Perpendicular constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch (1).3. Select another line in the sketch (2).

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding a coincident constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to start or end at the same point, by extending or shortening one or both lines. The lines do not have to intersect.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a coincident constraint:

Tekla Structures automatically creates coincident constraints:

• Where two lines meet.

• Between line segments when you draw them with the Sketch polyline tool.

• Between the start of the first line segment and the end of the last line segment in a shape, if they are within a certain distance of each other.

Page 236: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 236

1. Ensure that the Snap to end points snap switch is active.2. Click the Coincident constraint icon:

3. Pick the end of the first line (1).4. Pick the end of the second line. (2)

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding a fixed constraintYou can lock the position and angle of a line in a sketched cross section so that other constraints do not affect it.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a fixed constraint:

1. Click the Fixed constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch.

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding a horizontal constraintUse horizontal constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local x axis. Tekla Structures automatically creates horizontal constraints when you create lines that are nearly horizontal.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a horizontal constraint:

1. Click the Horizontal constraint icon:

2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).

Page 237: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 237

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding a vertical constraintUse vertical constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local y axis. Tekla Structures automatically creates vertical constraints when you create lines that are nearly vertical.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a vertical constraint:

1. Click the Vertical constraint icon:

2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Deleting a constraintTo delete a constraint from a sketched cross section:

1. Click to open the Sketch Browser.2. Select the constraint you want to delete.3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.4. Click Refresh.

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (234)

Adding dimensions to a sketched cross sectionAfter you have sketched a cross section, use dimensions to make different distances in the cross section parametric. You can use these dimensions to define the size of the profile cross section when you use it in a model.

Page 238: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 238

Tekla Structures also adds the dimensions you create to the list of variables that you can use in calculations.

See also Adding a radial dimension to a sketch (238)

Adding an angle dimension to a sketch (239)

Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch (239)

Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (240)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (240)

Deleting a dimension from a sketch (241)

Adding a radial dimension to a sketchYou can create a radial dimension for an arc or a circle in a sketched cross section.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a radial dimension:

1. Click the Sketch radial dimension icon:

2. Select the arc or circle.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Do not create too many dimensions in a sketch, or the dimensions will not be able to adjust when the values are changed.

In the following example, if you create the dimension marked in red, the dimension b1 will no longer work:

Page 239: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 239

Adding an angle dimension to a sketchYou can create an angle dimension between two lines in a sketched cross section. The angle is calculated anti-clockwise from the first line you select.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add an angle dimension:

1. Click the Sketch angle dimension icon:

2. Select the first line (1).3. Select the second line (2).

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Adding a dimension between two points in a sketchYou can add a dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a dimension between two points in a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch free dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

If you are unable to see the angle symbol, scroll with the mouse wheel to zoom in.

Page 240: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 240

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketchYou can add a horizontal dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a horizontal dimension to a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch horizontal dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketchYou can add a vertical dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a vertical dimension to a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch vertical dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

Page 241: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 241

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Deleting a dimension from a sketchTo delete a dimension from a sketched cross section:

1. Select the dimension you want to delete.2. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross sectionWhen you sketch a cross section, you can define positioning planes for it. With positioning planes you can determine the planes Tekla Structures will use for positioning parts and components.

See also Part positioning planes (241)

Connection positioning planes (242)

Showing and hiding positioning planes (243)

Moving positioning planes (243)

Moving positioning plane handles (244)

Reverting to default positioning planes (245)

Part positioning planesWith part positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions parts that have a sketched profile cross section. These planes are used for the On plane and At depth settings for parts, and also when placing custom components that are bound to boundary planes.

The part positioning planes are displayed in blue:

Page 242: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 242

The On plane options Left and Right are set according to the vertical blue planes, and the Middle option is halfway between them.

The same principle applies to the At depth setting: the Front and Behind options are set according to the horizontal blue planes, and the Middle option is halfway between them.

Example You can define part positioning planes so that an asymmetric cross section will be positioned according to its web only. In the following example, the Middle option is illustrated in gray dotted lines:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Connection positioning planesWith connection positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions components in relation to the component main part that has a sketched profile cross section.

The connection positioning planes are displayed in green:

Middle option

Page 243: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 243

Example The following image shows the default connection positioning planes of a double tee slab that was created as a sketched cross section. The green line illustrates the default connection positioning planes.

To place connections according to the location of the stems of the double tee, move the connection positioning planes as shown below.

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Showing and hiding positioning planesBefore you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To show or hide the positioning planes, do one of the following:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Moving positioning planesTo move positioning planes:

1. Display the positioning planes you want to move.2. Select the positioning planes.

To Do this

Show or hide the part positioning planes Click .

Show or hide the connection positioning planes Click .

Page 244: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 244

3. Select one of the positioning plane handles.

4. Right-click and select a Move command from the pop-up menu.5. Move the planes like any other object in Tekla Structures.

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Showing and hiding positioning planes (243)

Moving an object

Moving positioning plane handlesYou can move the handles of each positioning plane. If you move the handles away from the outmost corners of the sketched cross section, you must bind them by adding a dimension to each handle. Otherwise the positioning will not function correctly in the model.

To move the positioning plane handles:

1. Click the positioning plane to display the handles.The handles are displayed in pink. By default, the handles are at the outmost corners of the sketched cross section. For example:

2. Click a handle to select it.3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures. For example:

a Right-click and select Move.b Pick the origin for moving.c Pick a destination point.

4. If the handle is not at the outmost corner of the cross section, add a dimension between the handle and the corner.

Example In the following examples, the left handle of the positioning plane has been bound by using a horizontal dimension (b1):

The same handle controls both the vertical and horizontal plane, so you can move them both at the same time.

Page 245: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 245

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Reverting to default positioning planesYou can revert back to the default positioning planes of a sketched cross section if you have moved the planes.

To revert to the default positioning planes, do one of the following:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Checking a sketched cross sectionTo check that the constraints and dimensions in a sketched cross section work correctly:

1. Double-click a dimension line to open the Distance Properties dialog box.2. Change the Value field.3. Click Modify.

Tekla Structures updates the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To Do this

Revert to the default part positioning planes 1. Click to show the part positioning

planes.2. Select the part positioning planes.3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up

menu.

4. Click again to check that the planes have reverted back to the default.

Revert to the default connection positioning planes 1. Click to show the connection

positioning planes.2. Select the connection positioning planes.3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up

menu.

4. Click again to check that the planes have reverted back to the default.

Page 246: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 246

4. Check that the shape of the profile does not change and that the dimensions adjust correctly.5. Click Cancel to close the Distance Properties dialog box.

See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (249)

Saving a sketched cross sectionTekla Structures saves the cross section in the current model folder. The sketched cross sections are available in the Others section in the profile catalog.

To save a sketched cross section, do one of the following:

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (237)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (250)

Modifying a sketched cross sectionYou can modify existing cross section sketches, for example, by modifying chamfers or dimensions. You can also move corners or holes by moving the handles. The chamfers are moved automatically when you move the handles.

Note the following limitations when naming cross sections:

• You cannot use the name of a standard profile.

• You cannot include numbers, special characters, or blank spaces in the cross section name.

• Lower case letters are automatically converted into upper case letters.

To Do this

Save a new cross section1. Click Save sketch .2. Type a name in the Prefix field, and then click

OK.

Update an existing cross section 1. Click Save sketch .

2. Click Yes when prompted to update the existing cross section.

Save a copy of the cross section under a different name

1. Click Save sketch as .2. Type a new name in the Prefix field, and then

click OK.

Sketched cross sections are saved in the xslib.db1 file, which is a library file that contains custom components and sketches. Ordinary profiles are saved in the profdb.bin file.

Page 247: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 247

To modify a sketched cross section:

1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor...The Component Catalog dialog box opens.

2. Double-click a cross section to open it in the cross section sketch editor.

Sketched cross sections have the symbol next to their name.

3. Double-click an object to modify its properties.The sketch objects you can modify appear in yellow.

4. Modify the object properties.5. Click Modify in the object properties dialog box.6. Close the object properties dialog box.

7. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (247)

Setting the sketch thickness (247)

Modifying chamfers in a sketchYou can change the shape and dimensions of chamfers in a sketched cross section. For example, you can create rounded cross section corners.

To modify a chamfer:

1. Double-click a chamfer symbol in the cross section sketch editor.2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, change the shape and dimensions of the chamfer.3. Click Modify.4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

5. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (246)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (112)

Setting the sketch thicknessIf you have sketched an open shape, such as a cold rolled section, you must define the extrusion type and thickness of the sketch in the Sketch Browser. The thickness can be either fixed or parametric.

• You cannot change dimensions that have been calculated using formulas in the Variables dialog box.

• Constraints may also prevent you from changing dimensions.

Page 248: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 248

To set the thickness of a sketch:

1. In the cross section sketch editor, sketch an open polyline.2. Do one of the following:

• To set a fixed thickness:

a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from the pop-up menu.

b Type the value of the thickness after =.

• To define a parametric thickness:

a In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter variable for Length (for example, P1).b In the Formula column, define the default value for the parameter variable.c In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from the pop-up

menu.d Type the name of the parameter variable (for example, P1) after =.

3. To define the extrusion type:a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Extrusion Type and select Add Equation from the

pop-up menu.b Type the extrusion type number (0, 1, or 2) after =.

4. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (246)

Cross section extrusion types (248)

Cross section extrusion typesThe extrusion type defines how a cross section of a consistent thickness is extruded. When you change the thickness, the profile grows inwards, outwards, or symmetrically in both directions, depending on the extrusion type. You must define the extrusion type for cross sections that consist of an open polyline.

The extrusion types are:

Type Description Image

0 The sketch is extruded symmetrically to the outside and inside of the polyline.

(Default)

Page 249: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 249

See also Setting the sketch thickness (247)

Using sketched cross sections in a modelOnce you have created a cross section and saved it in the profile catalog, you are ready to use it in the model. If you have applied constraints correctly, the shape of the profile will be maintained when you change its dimensions.

To use a sketched cross section for a new part in a model:

1. Double-click a toolbar button to open the part properties dialog box.

For example, to open the beam properties dialog box, double-click .

2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree.4. Select a profile with the sketched cross section.5. Optional: If the cross section is parametric, define its dimensions in the Value column on the

General tab.6. Click OK to close the Select Profile dialog box.7. Click Apply to use the selected profile in the model.8. Pick points to place the part in the model.

See also Creating an image of a sketched cross section (249)

Creating an image of a sketched cross sectionTo illustrate the shape and dimensions of your profile cross section, you can create an image of the cross section you have sketched. Tekla Structures displays the image when you browse for sketched profiles in the profile catalog.

The image must be in Windows bitmap format (*.bmp) and can be created with any bitmap editor, for example Microsoft Paint. You can also take a screenshot of your cross section in the cross section sketch editor and use that image.

To create an image of a sketched cross section using a screenshot:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

1 The sketch is extruded to the outside of the polyline.

2 The sketch is extruded to the inside of the polyline.

Type Description Image

Page 250: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 250

2. Click the sketch to ensure it is the active view.3. Press F12 on your keyboard to take a screenshot of the sketch without the borders.

Tekla Structures saves the screenshot in the ..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\snapshots folder.

4. Open the screenshot in any graphics editor (for example, Microsoft Paint) and modify the image if necessary.

5. Save the image in bmp format in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.Use the cross section name as the filename, for example, mysketch.bmp.

See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (249)

Creating a screenshot (129)

Saving a screenshot in bitmap format (130)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sectionsTo use a sketched cross section in other Tekla Structures models, you have to export the cross section to a file (*.uel), and then import the file into another Tekla Structures model.

Use the Component Catalog to import and export sketched cross sections. They have the following symbols and numbers in the Component Catalog:

See also Importing sketched cross sections (250)

Exporting sketched cross sections (251)

Importing sketched cross sectionsAfter you have exported sketched cross sections to a file, you can import the cross sections to another Tekla Structures model.

To import sketched cross sections:

Page 251: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 251

1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to import to.2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.3. Optional: To view the sketched cross sections and profiles already available in the current

model, select Sketched profiles from the list box.4. In the component list, right-click and select Import... from the pop-up menu.5. In the Import Components dialog box, browse for the folder which contains the exported file

(*.uel).6. Select the file to import.7. Click OK.

See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (250)

Exporting the profile catalog

Exporting elements from the profile catalog

Exporting sketched cross sectionsTo export sketched cross sections:

1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export from.2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.3. Select Sketched profiles from the list.

Tekla Structures lists all the sketched cross sections available in the current model.

4. Select the cross sections you want to export. To export several cross sections, hold down the Ctrl key when selecting.

5. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu.6. In the Export Components dialog box, enter a name for the export file in the Selection box.7. Optional: To save the export file to a specific location, browse for the folder.

By default, Tekla Structures saves the export file in the current model folder.

8. Click OK.

See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (250)

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross sectionThis example shows how to create a cross section using variables. You will create a symmetric C-shaped cross section with the dimensions b1 = b2 and h2 = h3. When you use the profile in the model, you can change the following dimensions:

• Width (b1)

• Total height (h1)

If you have created a profile using a sketched cross section and want to use the profile in another model, you need to import both the cross section and profile. To use profiles from a model, you can either export and then import the entire profile catalog or a part of it, or copy the profdb.bin file.

To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating a new model, use the advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.

Page 252: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 252

• Height (h2)

• Thickness (P1)

• Chamfers (P2)

In the following example, you will first sketch a C-shaped cross section and add dimensions to it. After that, you will set the cross section thickness and modify the chamfers. Finally, you will use the cross section in a model.

See also Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section (252)

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section (253)

Example: Setting the cross section thickness (254)

Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section (255)

Example: Using the cross section in a model (256)

Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross sectionTo sketch the outline of a C-shaped cross section:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.2. Use the Sketch polyline command to create a rough C-shaped cross section.

At this stage, the cross section does not have to be symmetric or have the right dimensions.

3. Straighten the lines using the Add horizontal constraint and Add vertical

constraint commands.

Page 253: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 253

4. Save the cross section and name it CSHAPE.

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (229)

Sketching a polyline (232)

Adding a horizontal constraint (236)

Adding a vertical constraint (237)

Saving a sketched cross section (246)

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross sectionTo add dimensions to the cross section:

1. Use the Sketch horizontal dimension command to create the distances b1 and b2.

2. Use the Sketch vertical dimension command to create the distances h1, h2, and h3.

Page 254: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 254

3. In the Variables dialog box, enter the following values for the distances:

4. Ensure that Visibility is set to Show for the distances b1, h1, and h2.5. Save the cross section.

See also Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (240)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (240)

Saving a sketched cross section (246)

Variables (231)

Example: Setting the cross section thicknessTo set the cross section thickness:

1. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:a Click Add to add a parameter variable P1.b In the Formula box, enter 20.00.c In the Visiblity box, select Show.d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Thickness.

2. In the Sketch Browser, set the cross section thickness using the parameter variable P1.a Right-click Thickness, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter

=P1.b Right-click ExtrusionType, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter

=2 to get the sketch extruded to the inside of the polyline.

Page 255: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 255

3. Save the cross section.

See also Variables (231)

Sketch Browser (230)

Cross section extrusion types (248)

Saving a sketched cross section (246)

Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross sectionTo modify the chamfers of the cross section:

1. Double-click one of the cross section chamfers.2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, do the following:

a Change the chamfer type to Line .b Click Modify.c Repeat steps a–b for all the cross section chamfers.

3. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:a Click Add to add a parameter variable P2.b In the Formula box, enter 10.00.c In the Visiblity box, select Show.d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Chamfer.

4. In the Sketch Browser, do the following:a Double-click Chamfer constraint to open the chamfer properties.b Right-click Chamfer X, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter

=P2.c Enter the same value for Chamfer Y.d Repeat steps a–d for all the cross section chamfers.

Page 256: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 256

5. Save the cross section.

See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (247)

Variables (231)

Sketch Browser (230)

Saving a sketched cross section (246)

Example: Using the cross section in a modelTo use the cross section in a model:

1. Double-click a toolbar button open the part properties dialog box.2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.

• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree, and select the CSHAPE profile.4. Optional: Modify the dimensions of the cross section profile on the General tab.

5. Click OK to apply the changes.6. Pick points to place the part in the model.

Page 257: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 257

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (246)

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (241)

Page 258: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Sketched cross sectionsAdvanced modeling 258

Page 259: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General settingsModeling settings 259

11 Modeling settings

This section provides more information about the various settings you can modify in Tekla Structures.

Contents • General settings (259)

• View and representation settings (262)

• Part properties (267)• Detail properties (285)

• Numbering settings (292)

11.1 General settingsThis section provides more information about some general modeling settings.

Contents Grid properties (259)

Grid line properties (260)

Point properties (260)

Rotation settings (261)

Screenshot settings (261)

Grid propertiesUse the Grid dialog box to view and modify the grid properties.

Option Description

Coordinates The coordinates of the grid in the global x, y, and z directions (x and y are relative, z is absolute).

• X - grid lines vertical to the work plane

• Y - grid lines horizontal to the work plane

• Z - elevations in the structure

Labels The names of the grid lines.

Line extensions Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below and Right/Above.

Page 260: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General settingsModeling settings 260

See also Grids (30)

Grid line propertiesUse the Grid Line Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a single grid line.

See also Grid lines (33)

Point propertiesUse the Point Information dialog box to view and modify the properties of a point.

See also Points (45)

Origin The coordinates of the grid origin in the global x, y, and z directions.

Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to grid lines.

User-defined attributes...

Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid.

Option Description

Option Description

Label The name of the grid line.

Depth in view plane The height of the grid plane perpendicular to the view plane.

Extension Left/Below Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below and Right/Above.

Extension Right/Above

Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to the grid line.

User-defined attributes...

Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid line.

Visible in drawings Select to make the grid line visible in drawings.

Grid line automatic dimensioning

Select to use single grid lines in grid dimensioning.

Option Description

Phase The phase number.

You can filter objects by their phase numbers.

Id The ID number, which is used in log files.

You can filter objects by their ID numbers.

Coordinates The local (work plane) and global x, y, and z coordinates of a point. Indicates the correct location of the point.

Page 261: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General settingsModeling settings 261

Rotation settingsUse the Copy - Rotate and Move - Rotate dialog boxes to view and modify the settings that are used when you rotate objects in Tekla Structures.

See also Rotating objects

Screenshot settingsUse the Screenshot dialog box to view and modify the screenshot settings.

The following screenshot options are only available in rendered views:

Option Description

X0 The x and y coordinates of the starting point of the rotation axis.

Y0

Origin angle The angle of the rotation axis when rotating around a line on the work plane.

Number of copies Defines the number of copies created.

dZ The difference in position between the original and copied object in the z direction.

Rotation angle The rotation angle between the original and new position.

Around Defines whether the rotation axis is a line on the work plane or in the z direction.

Option Description

View name Shows the selected view name.

View Includes the view content and window borders in the screenshot.

View without borders Includes only the view content in the screenshot.

Rendered view For high resolution screenshots from rendered views. The Options... button displays the Screenshot Options dialog box.

Place on clipboard Places the screenshot on the clipboard.

Print to file Saves the screenshot to a file.

Option Description

Final width The width of the screenshot.

Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.

Final height The height of the screenshot.

Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.

Page 262: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

View and representation settingsModeling settings 262

See also Creating a screenshot (129)

11.2 View and representation settingsThis section provides more information about specific view and representation settings.

Contents View properties (262)

Grid view properties (264)

Display settings (264)

Color settings for parts (265)

Color settings for object groups (266)

Transparency settings for object groups (267)

View propertiesUse the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the view properties.

DPI The pixel density (DPI) of the screenshot.

There are limitations to pixel density. You can change the DPI using a graphics editor.

White background Uses white background.

Smooth lines Uses smooth lines to decrease jagged edges.

Line width Sets the line width.

Option Description

Option Description

Name The name of the view.

Angle Whether the view angle is Plane or 3D.

Projection The projection type of rendered views.

Orthogonal: All objects are of equal size (no perspective). When you zoom, text and point size remains the same. In addition, the zoom remains on part surfaces.

Perspective: Distant objects appear smaller than close ones, as do text and points. You can zoom, rotate the model, or fly through it.

Rotation How the view is rotated around the z and x axes. Rotation is view-specific.

Color and transparency in all views

The color and transparency setting that is used in all views (according to the status of the objects in the model).

Representation... Opens the Object Representation dialog box for defining color and transparency settings.

Page 263: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

View and representation settingsModeling settings 263

See also Views (34)

Default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit view propertiesTekla Structures creates 3D and default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit model views using the properties in the following files:

• 3D part view: part_basic_view

• Part front view: part_front_view

• Part top view: part_top_view• Part end view: part_end_view

• Part perspective view: part_persp_view

• 3D component view: joint_basic_view• Component front view: joint_front_view

• Component top view: joint_top_view

• Component end view: joint_end_view• Component perspective view: joint_persp_view

• Custom component front view: custom_object_editor_front_view

• Custom component top view: custom_object_editor_top_view• Custom component end view: custom_object_editor_end_view

• Custom component perspective view: custom_object_editor_perspective_view

• 3D assembly or cast unit view: assembly_basic_view• Assembly or cast unit front view: assembly_front_view

• Assembly or cast unit top view: assembly_top_view

• Assembly or cast unit end view: assembly_end_view

• Assembly or cast unit back view: assembly_back_view• Assembly or cast unit bottom view: assembly_bottom_view

• Assembly or cast unit perspective view: assebly_persp_view

See also Creating a view (36)

View and representation settings (262)

View depth The thickness of the displayed slice of model. You can define the depth separately upwards and downwards from the view plane. Only objects positioned within the view depth are visible in the model.

Display... Opens the Display dialog box for defining which objects are displayed in the view and how.

Visible object group Which object group is displayed in the view.

Object group... Opens the Object Group - View Filter dialog box for creating and modifying object groups.

Option Description

You can modify the view properties before you create the views: Load the desired view properties in the View Properties dialog box and change the settings as required.

Page 264: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

View and representation settingsModeling settings 264

Grid view propertiesUse the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box to view and modify the properties of grid views.

See also Creating grid views (39)

Display settingsUse the Display dialog box to define which object types Tekla Structures displays and how they appear in the model. Some of these settings may affect system performance.

Option Description

View plane The plane of the view defined by two axes similarly to the default view.

Number of views Defines which grid lines the views will be created of.

None does not create any views.

One (First) only creates the view closest to the grid origin.

One (Last) only creates the view furthest from the grid origin.

All creates all views in grid planes in the relevant direction.

View name prefix The prefix to be used with the grid label in the view name. This name overrides the name in the view properties.

View names consist of a prefix and a grid label, e.g. PLAN +3000. If the View name prefix field is left empty, no prefix is used. Tekla Structures adds a dash and a running number to the view name if view names are otherwise identical.

View properties Defines which view properties (applied or saved) will be used.

Each view plane has its own view properties. You can load the properties from the current view properties with the option <applied values> or from saved view properties. The Show... button displays the current view properties.

Option Description

Parts Defines how parts are displayed.

Fast uses a rapid drawing technique that displays internal hidden edges, but skips cuts. The setting does not automatically affect already modeled parts. When you switch this setting on, the fast representation mode will be applied only to newly created parts and to parts that are displayed with the Show with Exact Lines command.

Exact displays the cuts, but hides the internal hidden lines of parts.

Reference line shows parts as sticks. This option increases display speed significantly, when viewing the entire model, or large parts of it.

Page 265: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

View and representation settingsModeling settings 265

See also Defining which objects are displayed (132)

Color settings for partsUse the Class value to change the color of a part.

Bolts Defines how bolts are displayed.

Fast displays the axis and a cross to represent the bolt head. This is the recommended representation mode for bolts, because it increases display speed significantly and consumes less system memory.

Exact shows bolts, washers, and nuts as solids.

Holes Defines how holes are displayed.

Fast only displays the circle in the first plane. When using this option, Tekla Structures always displays fast holes on the first part (counting from the head of the bolt). If there are slotted holes in any of the parts, a slotted hole is displayed on the first part, even if the hole in that part is not slotted. The new slotted hole has the same size and rotation as the first slotted hole (counting from the head of the bolt).

Holes that are outside a part are always displayed as fast holes in rendered views.

Exact shows holes as solids.

Exact long holes only displays slotted holes in exact mode and ordinary holes in fast mode.

Point size Defines the size of points in views. You can also change the size of the part handle using this field.

In model increases the point size on the screen when you zoom in.

In view does not increase the point size.

AutoStick Defines whether the objects are shown as sticks or as objects.

This option is only available in wire frame views. To enable the wire frame, set the advanced XS_ENABLE_WIRE_FRAME to TRUE and set Wireframe as the view type in the View Properties dialog box.

By dragging the sliders you can adjust the zoom distance where objects should be shown as sticks.

This option increases performance significantly when viewing large models. It still lets you zoom in on a small area and display it exactly.

Option Description

Class Color

1 light gray

2 or 0 red

Page 266: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

View and representation settingsModeling settings 266

See also Changing the color of a part (69)

Color settings for object groupsUse the Object Representation dialog box to define the color of object groups.

3 green

4 blue

5 turquoise

6 yellow

7 magenta

8 gray

9 rose

10 lime

11 aqua

12 pink

13 orange

14 light blue

Class Color

Option Description

As is The current color is used.

If the object belongs to one of the object groups defined in the following rows, its color is defined by the settings that the object group in question has on that row.

Colors Select color from the list.

Color by class All parts are colored according to their Class property.

Color by lot Parts belonging to different lots get different colors.

Color by phase Parts belonging to different phases get different colors.

Color by analysis type

Displays parts according to the member analysis type.

Color by analysis utility check

Displays parts according to the utilization ratio in analysis.

Color by attribute Displays parts in different colors according to the values of a user-defined attribute.

Page 267: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 267

See also Object representation settings (139)

Transparency settings for object groupsUse the Object Representation dialog box to define the transparency of object groups.

See also Object representation settings (139)

11.3 Part propertiesThis section provides more information about the properties of specific steel and concrete parts.

Contents Steel column properties (267)

Steel beam properties (268)

Contour plate properties (269)

Orthogonal beam properties (270)

Twin profile properties (271)

Pad footing properties (272)

Strip footing properties (272)

Concrete column properties (273)

Concrete beam properties (274)

Concrete slab properties (275)

Concrete panel properties (276)

User-defined attributes (277)

Steel column propertiesUse the Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel column. The file name extension of a column properties file is *.clm.

Option Description

As is The current visibility.

If the object belongs to any object group whose visibility and color settings have been defined, the settings will be read from that object group.

Visible Object is shown in the views.

50% transparent Object is transparent in rendered views.

70% transparent

90% transparent

Hidden Object is not shown in the views.

Option Description

Part prefix and start number

The part mark series of the column.

Page 268: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 268

See also Creating a steel column (69)

Steel beam propertiesUse the Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel beam, steel polybeam, or curved beam. The file name extension of a beam properties file is *.prt.

Assembly prefix and start number

The assembly mark series of the column.

Name The user-definable name of the column.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the column.

Material The material of the column.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group columns.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the column.

Vertical The position of the column, relative to its handle.

Rotation How the column is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its handle.

Top The position of the second end of the column in the global z direction.

Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global z direction.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the column.

Option Description

Option Description

Part prefix and start number

The part mark series of a beam.

Assembly prefix and start number

The assembly mark series of the beam.

Name The user-definable name of a beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Page 269: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 269

See also Creating a steel beam (70)

Contour plate propertiesUse the Contour Plate Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a contour plate. The file name extension of a contour plate properties file is *.cpl.

Profile The profile of a beam.

Material The material of a beam.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of a beam.

On plane The position of a beam on the work plane.

Rotation How much a beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of a beam, in terms of depth perpendicular to the work plane.

End offset The offsets of beam ends, relative to the beam’s handles.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of a curved beam.

Number of segments The number of segments Tekla Structures uses when drawing a curved beam.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the beam.

Option Description

Option Description

Part prefix and start number

The part mark series of the contour plate.

Assembly prefix and start number

The assembly mark series of the contour plate.

Name The user-definable name of the contour plate.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the contour plate.

The format is PL+ thickness, for example PL20.

Material The material of the contour plate.

Page 270: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 270

See also Creating a contour plate (71)

Orthogonal beam propertiesUse the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an orthogonal steel beam. The file name extension of an orthogonal beam properties file is *.crs.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group contour plates.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the contour plate.

At depth The position of the contour plate, in terms of depth, perpendicular to the work plane.

Option Description

Option Description

Part prefix and start number

The part mark series of the beam.

Assembly prefix and start number

The assembly mark series of the beam.

Name The user-definable name of the beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the beam.

Material The material of the beam.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the beam.

Vertical The position of the beam, relative to its handle.

Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the beam, relative to its handle.

Page 271: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 271

See also Creating an orthogonal beam (72)

Twin profile propertiesUse the Twin Profile Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a twin steel profile. The file name extension of a twin profile properties file is *.dia.

Top The position of the second end of the beam in the z direction of the work plane.

Bottom The position of the first end of the beam in the z direction of the work plane.

Option Description

Option Description

Part prefix and start number

The part mark series of the twin profile.

Assembly prefix and start number

The assembly mark series of the twin profile.

Name The user-definable name of the twin profile.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of both the beams in the twin profile.

Material The material of the beams.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group twin profiles.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the twin profile.

On plane The position of the twin profile on the work plane.

Rotation Defines how the twin profile is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The beam position, in terms of depth, perpendicular to the work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to the beam’s handles.

Twin profile type Defines how the profiles are combined.

Horizontal The horizontal clearance between the profiles.

Vertical The vertical clearance between the profiles.

Page 272: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 272

See also Creating a twin profile (73)

Pad footing propertiesUse the Pad Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a pad footing. The file name extension of a pad footing properties file is *.cpf.

See also Creating a pad footing (81)

Strip footing propertiesUse the Strip Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a strip footing. The file name extension of a strip footing properties file is *.csf.

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the pad footing.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the pad footing.

Material The material of the pad footing.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group pad footings.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the pad footing.

Vertical The vertical position of the pad footing, relative to its handle.

Rotation How much the pad footing is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the pad footing, relative to its handle.

Top The position of the top surface of the pad footing in the global z direction.

Bottom The position of the bottom surface of the pad footing in the global z direction.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the pad footing.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.

Page 273: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 273

See also Creating a strip footing (81)

Concrete column propertiesUse the Concrete Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete column. The file name extension of a concrete column properties file is *.ccl.

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the strip footing.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the strip footing.

Material The material of the strip footing.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group strip footings.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the strip footing.

On plane The position of the strip footing on the work plane.

Rotation How much the strip footing is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of the strip footing in terms of depth perpendicular to the work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the strip footing, relative to its handles.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the strip footing.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved strip footing.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved strip footing.

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the column.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the column.

Page 274: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 274

See also Creating a concrete column (81)

Concrete beam propertiesUse the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete beam or polybeam. The file name extension of a concrete beam properties file is *.cbm.

Material The material of the column.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group columns.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the column.

Vertical The vertical position of the column, relative to its handle.

Rotation How much the column is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its handle.

Top The position of the second end of the column in the global z direction.

Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global z direction.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the column.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the column is precast or cast in place.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the column.

Option Description

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the beam.

Material The material of the beam.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Page 275: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 275

See also Creating a concrete beam (82)

Concrete slab propertiesUse the Concrete Slab Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete slab. The file name extension of a concrete slab properties file is *.csl.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the beam.

On plane The beam position on the work plane.

Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of the beam in terms of depth perpendicular to the work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to its handles.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved beam.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved beam.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the beam.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the beam is precast or cast in place.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the beam.

Option Description

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the slab.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Thickness The thickness of the slab.

Material The material of the slab.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group slabs.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the slab.

Page 276: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part propertiesModeling settings 276

See also Creating a concrete slab (83)

Concrete panel propertiesUse the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete panel. The file name extension of a concrete panel properties file is *.cpn.

See also Creating a concrete panel (84)

At depth The position of the slab, in terms of depth, perpendicular to the work plane.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the slab.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the slab is precast or cast in place.

Option Description

Option Description

Name The user-definable name of the panel.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the panel (thickness × height of the wall).

Material The material of the panel.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group panels.

For example, you can display parts of different classes in different colors.

User-defined attributes

User-defined properties of the panel.

On plane The position of the panel on the work plane.

Rotation How much the panel is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of the panel, in terms of depth perpendicular to the work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the panel, relative to its handles.

Cast unit prefix and start number

Define the cast unit series of the panel.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the panel is precast or cast in place.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved panel.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved panel.

Page 277: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 277

User-defined attributesUser-defined attributes provide extra information about a part. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists. The following table gives some examples of what you can use attributes for:

See also Common elements in marks

Part properties (267)

Adding properties

11.4 Part position settingsThis section provides more information about specific part position settings. These settings can be modified on the Position tab in the part properties dialog box, or by using the Mini Toolbar.

Contents Position on the work plane (277)

Rotation (279)

Position depth (279)

Vertical position (281)

Horizontal position (282)

End offsets (284)

Position on the work planeUse the On plane option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the part’s position on the work plane. The position is always relative to the part’s handles.

Attribute Can be used...

Comment In part and weld marks in Tekla Structures drawings, or in projects.

Shorten When drawings of the parts are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by this value. This is useful when creating assembly drawings of bracing bars that should always be under tension.

Camber In part marks in Tekla Structures drawings.

Preliminary mark To obtain preliminary marks for parts in reports.

Locked To protect objects from being accidentally changed.

Shear, Tension, and Moment

To save reaction forces for AutoDefaults. You can enter forces separately for each end of a part.

User field 1...4 User-defined fields. You can change the names of these fields and add new user-defined fields.

Connection code When importing information on connection types into Tekla Structures. You can then use the connection codes as rules in AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Each end of a part can have a different connection code.

Moment connection For selecting whether to show moment connection symbols in drawings or not.

Page 278: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 278

Examples

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Option Description Example

Middle The handles are in the middle of the part.

Right The part is positioned underneath its handles.

Left The part is positioned above its handles.

Position Example

Middle 300

Right 300

Left 300

Page 279: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 279

RotationUse the Rotation option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the rotation of a part around its axis on the work plane.

You can also define the angle of rotation. Tekla Structures measures positive values clockwise around the local x axis.

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Position depthUse the At depth option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the position depth of the part. The position is always perpendicular to the work plane.

Option Description Example

Front The work plane is parallel to the front plane of the part.

Top The work plane is parallel to the top plane of the part.

Back The work plane is parallel to the back plane of the part.

Below The work plane is parallel to the bottom plane of the part.

Page 280: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 280

Examples

Option Description Example

Middle The part is positioned in the middle of the work plane.

Front The part is positioned above the work plane.

Behind The part is positioned underneath the work plane.

Position Example

Middle 400

Front 400

Page 281: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 281

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Vertical positionUse the Vertical option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the vertical position of the part. The position is always relative to the part’s handles.

Behind 400

Position Example

Option Description Example

Middle The handle is in the middle of the part.

Down The part is positioned underneath its handle.

Up The part is positioned above its handle.

Page 282: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 282

Examples

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Horizontal positionUse the Horizontal option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the horizontal position of the part. The position is always relative to the part’s handle.

Position Example

Middle 200

Down 200

Up 200

Option Description Example

Middle The handle is in the middle of the part.

Page 283: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 283

Examples

Left The part is positioned on the left side of its handle.

Right The part is positioned on the right side of its handle.

Option Description Example

Position Example

Middle 150

Left 150

Right 150

Page 284: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Part position settingsModeling settings 284

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

End offsetsUse the Dx, Dy and Dz options in the part properties dialog box to move the ends of a part, relative to its handles. You can enter positive and negative values.

Examples

Option Description

Dx Changes the length of the part by moving the part end point along the line formed by the part handles.

Dy Moves the part end perpendicular to the part handles.

Dz Moves the part end in the z direction of the work plane.

Position Example

Dx

End point: 200

Dx

End point: -200

Dy

End point: 300

Dy

End point: -300

Dz

End point: 400

Page 285: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 285

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

11.5 Detail propertiesThis section provides more information about the properties of specific modeling details.

Contents Bolt properties (285)

Weld properties (287)

List of weld types (289)

Corner chamfer properties (291)

Edge chamfer properties (291)

Bolt propertiesUse the Bolt Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a bolt group.

Dz

End point: -400

Position Example

Option Description

Bolt size Bolt diameter.

Bolt standard Bolt assembly standard/grade.

Bolt type Defines whether the bolts are assembled on-site or in the shop.

Connect part/assembly

Indicates whether you are bolting a secondary part or a sub-assembly.

Thread in material Indicates if the thread of the bolt can be inside the bolted parts. Tekla Structures does not use this value when calculating the length of full-threaded bolts.

Page 286: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 286

Cut length Indicates which parts the bolt connects. The value defines the area Tekla Structures should search for parts that belong to the bolt group. Using cut length you can determine whether the bolt will go through one flange or two.

Tekla Structures searches for parts using half the cut length value, in both directions from the bolt group plane. In the illustration below, A is the cut length and B is the bolt origin. Tekla Structures calculates the search area as A/2 in both directions from point B.

Tekla Structures warns you if the cut length is too small (i.e. the bolt group contains no parts) and makes the bolt length 100 mm.

If there are large gaps between the connected parts, the gap is added to the length of the bolt. Tekla Structures calculates bolt length using the the total distance between the first and last surfaces.

If you want to force a bolt to be a certain length, enter a negative value for cut length (e.g. -150).

Extra length Additional bolt length.

Increases the material thickness that Tekla Structures uses when calculating bolt length. For example, you might need extra bolt length to allow for painting. You can also build additional lengths into bolt assemblies.

Shape Bolt group shape.

Bolt dist X Bolt spacing, number, or co-ordinate, depending on the bolt group shape.

Bolt dist Y Bolt spacing, group diameter, or coordinate, depending on the bolt group shape.

Tolerance Tolerance = Hole diameter - Bolt diameter

Hole type Oversized or slotted. Field activates after you select the Parts with slotted holes check boxes.

Option Description

Page 287: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 287

See also Bolts (91)

Weld propertiesUse the Weld Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld.

Slotted hole X x allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.

Slotted hole Y y allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.

Rotate Slots If the bolt connects several parts, you may want to rotate alternate holes by 90 degrees. This allows the bolt to move in different directions.

On plane Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the bolt group x axis.

Rotation Defines how far the bolt group is rotated around the x axis, relative to the current work plane.

For example, you can use this field to indicate on which side of the connected parts you want the bolt head to be.

At depth Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the current work plane.

Dx, Dy, Dz Offsets that move the bolt group by moving the bolt group x axis.

Option Description

Some of the properties are only displayed in reports, not in drawings.

Option Description

Prefix See Weld size prefixes (99).

Size The size of the weld.

If you enter a zero or negative weld size, Tekla Structures creates the weld, but does not display it drawings.

To display the weld object in the model in both Fast and Exact mode, remember to give the weld Size and Type in weld properties.

Type See List of weld types (289).

Page 288: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 288

Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.

Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symbol and the fill type contour symbol.

Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:

• None

• Flush

• Convex

• Concave

Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld type symbol in drawings. The options are:

• G (Grind)

• M (Machine)• C (Chip)

• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)

Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of the connection between the welded parts. You can set the exact length of a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start and end points of the weld.

Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds. Pitch is shown in the weld mark if the value is greater than 0.0.

To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-center spacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates the distance between the welds as the pitch minus the length of the weld.

Tekla Structures uses the – character by default to separate weld length and pitch, for example 50–100. To change the separator to @, for example, set the advanced option XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.

Root face Root face thickness is the height of the narrowest part inside the root opening. The RFT fields in the connection dialog boxes also refer to the root face thickness.

Neither root face nor RFT values appear in drawings, but you can use the WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS field in reports to show the root face dimension in the weld list.

Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.

Root opening The space between the welded parts.

Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example, information about the weld specification or process.

Option Description

Page 289: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 289

See also Welds (97)

XS_AISC_WELD_MARK

List of weld typesUse the Weld Properties dialog box to define the weld type. Some weld types also automatically prepare the parts to be welded. The following table shows the available weld types:

Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered, intermittent weld.

Stitch welds are s are staggered on both sides of the welded part. Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggered in weld symbols.

If you set this option to No, a non- staggered intermittent weld is created. To show the pitch in a weld mark, set Pitch to a value greater than 0.0.

Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a face should be welded.

A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around option has been used.

Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made. This setting affects assemblies and drawings.

Tekla Structures indicates site welds in the weld symbol using a flag.

NDT inspection level

Defines the non-desctructive testing and inspection level.

Connect part/assembly

See Using welds to create assemblies (75).

Position See Weld position (98).

Electrode classification

Defines the weld electrode classification.

Electrode strength

Defines the electrode strength.

Electrode coefficient

Defines the electrode strength coefficient.

Welding process type

Defines the process type.

Option Description

Weld type Name Number Preparation

None 0 No

Fillet weld 10 No

Bevel-groove (single-V butt weld)

3 Both parts

Page 290: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 290

Bevel-groove (single-bevel butt weld)

4 Secondary part

Square-groove (square butt weld)

2 No

Single-V butt weld with broad root face

5 Both edges

Single-bevel butt weld with broad root face

6 Secondary part

U-groove weld (single-U butt weld)

7 Both parts

J-groove weld (single-J butt weld)

8 Secondary part

Flare V-groove weld 16 Both parts

Flare-bevel-groove weld 15 Secondary part

Edge-flange weld 1 No

Corner-flange weld 17 No

Plug weld 11 No

Bevel backing weld 9 No

Spot weld 12 No

Seam weld 13 No

Slot weld 14 No

Partial penetration weld (single-bevel butt + fillet)

18 Secondary part

Partial penetration weld (square groove + fillet)

19 No

Melt-through weld 20 No

Steep-flanked single-V butt weld

21 No

Steep-flanked single-bevel butt weld

22 No

Edge weld 23 No

Surfacing weld 24 No

Weld type Name Number Preparation

Page 291: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Detail propertiesModeling settings 291

Corner chamfer propertiesUse the Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a corner chamfer.

See also Chamfering part corners (111)

Edge chamfer propertiesUse the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an edge chamfer.

Fold joint 25 No

Inclined joint 26 No

Option Description

Type The shape of the chamfer.

x The dimensions of the chamfer. The dimension depends on the chamfer type.

y

dz1 Only used for contour plates and concrete slabs.

Moves the top or bottom surface of the part corner in the part’s local z direction.

Use these fields, for example, to give plates varying thicknesses.

dz2

Weld type Name Number Preparation

Field Description More information

Type The shape of the chamfer.

Name The name of the chamfer.

Cutting distance in X direction

Defines how far away from the chamfered edge the chamfer will end in the x direction.

Cutting distance in Y direction

Defines how far away from the chamfered edge the chamfer will end in the y direction.

Page 292: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering settingsModeling settings 292

See also Chamfering part edges (113)

11.6 Numbering settingsThis section provides more information about specific numbering settings.

Contents General numbering settings (292)

Weld numbering settings (293)

Control number settings (294)

General numbering settingsUse the Numbering Setup dialog box to view and modify some general numbering settings.

First end type The shape and position of the first end point.

The options are:

• Full: The end point is positioned at the end of the part (moving along the nearest edge), and the shape is straight.

• Straight: The end point is positioned at the point you pick, and the shape is straight.

• Bevelled: The end point is positioned at the point you pick, and the shape is angled.

Second end type

The shape and position of the second end point.

Dimension The distance between the (picked) end point and the bevelled points.

Field Description More information

Option Description

Renumber all All parts get a new number. All information on previous numbers is lost.

Re-use old numbers Tekla Structures reuses the numbers of parts that have been deleted. These numbers may be used to number new or modified parts.

Check for standard parts

If a separate standard-part model has been set up, Tekla Structures compares the parts in the current model to those in the standard-part model.

If the part to be numbered is identical to a part in the standard-part model, Tekla Structures uses the same part number as in the standard-part model.

Compare to old The part gets the same number as a previously numbered similar part.

Page 293: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering settingsModeling settings 293

See also Numbering objects (174)

Creating a standard-part model (183)

Numbering examples (185)

Weld numbering settingsUse the Weld Numbering dialog box to view and modify the weld numbering settings. The weld number is displayed in drawings and weld reports.

Take new number The part gets a new number even if a similar numbered part already exists.

Keep number if possible

Modified parts maintain their previous numbers if possible. Even if a part or assembly becomes identical with another part or assembly, the original position number is maintained.

For example, you might have two different assemblies, B/1 and B/2, in the model. Later on you modify B/2 so that it becomes identical with B/1. If the Keep number if possible option is used, B/2 will maintain its original position number when you renumber the model.

Synchronize with master model

Use this setting when working in multi-user mode. Tekla Structures locks the master model and performs a save, numbering, and save sequence, so that all other users can continue working during the operation.

Automatic cloning If the main part of a drawing is modified and therefore gets a new assembly position, the existing drawing is automatically assigned to another part of the position.

If the modified part moves to an assembly position that does not have a drawing, the original drawing is automatically cloned to reflect the changes in the modified part.

Holes The location, size, and number of holes affects numbering.

Part name The part name affects numbering.

Beam orientation The orientation of beams affects numbering of assemblies.

Column orientation The orientation of columns affects numbering of assemblies.

Reinforcing bars The orientation of reinforcing bars affects numbering.

Embedded objects The orientation of equal embedded objects affects numbering.

Surface treatment Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies.

Tolerance Parts get the same number if their dimensions differ less than the value entered in this box.

Assembly position sort order

See Assembly position numbers (175).

Option Description

Page 294: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering settingsModeling settings 294

See also Numbering objects (174)

Control number settingsUse the Create control numbers (S9) dialog box to view and modify the control number settings.

Option Description

Start number The number from which the numbering starts. Tekla Structures automatically suggests the following free number as the start number.

Apply for Defines which objects are affected by the change.

All welds changes the number of all welds in the model.

Selected welds changes the number of the selected welds without affecting others.

Renumber also welds that have a number

Tekla Structures replaces existing weld numbers.

Re-use numbers of deleted welds If some welds have been removed, Tekla Structures uses their numbers when numbering other welds.

Option Description

Numbering Defines which parts get control numbers.

All creates consecutive numbers for all parts.

By numbering series creates control numbers for parts in a specific numbering series.

Assembly/Cast unit numbering series Defines the prefix and start number of the numbering series for which to create control numbers.

Needed only with the By numbering series option.

Start number of control numbers The number from which the numbering starts.

Step value Defines the interval between two control numbers.

Renumber Defines how to treat parts that already have control numbers.

Yes replaces the existing control numbers.

No keeps the existing control numbers.

Page 295: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering settingsModeling settings 295

See also Control numbers (176)

First direction Defines in what order to assign control numbers.

Second direction

Third direction

Option Description

Page 296: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Numbering settingsModeling settings 296

Page 297: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General modeling tipsModeling tips 297

12 Modeling tips

This section provides useful hints and tips that help you to model structures more quickly and accurately, and avoid potential problems with templates and drawings.

Contents • General modeling tips (297)

• Tips for creating and positioning parts (300)

12.1General modeling tipsThese tips will help you to use some basic modeling functionalities more efficiently.

Contents Right-hand rule (297)

Activating an overlapping view (297)

Hiding cut lines in a view (298)

Cutting efficiently (298)

Finding RGB values for colors (300)

Showing part reference lines in model views (300)

Right-hand ruleRight-hand rule indicates the direction of the coordinate axes. When you hold the thumb, index finger, and middle finger of your right hand so that they form three right angles, then the thumb symbolizes the x axis, the index finger the y axis, and the middle finger the z axis.

Activating an overlapping viewWhen you want to pick positions from two views that partly overlap, you can use the Xmouse option. With Xmouse active, simply moving the mouse pointer over a view activates the view.

To activate a view using Xmouse:

Page 298: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General modeling tipsModeling tips 298

1. Click Tools > Options > Xmouse to switch on Xmouse.A check mark appears next to the menu option if Xmouse is already switched on.

2. To activate a view, do one of the following:• Move the mouse pointer over the view.

• Use the Page Up, Page Down and arrow keys.

See also Views (34)

Hiding cut lines in a viewTo hide all cut lines in a view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.3. Clear the Cuts check box.4. Click Modify.

See also Cuts (115)

Cutting efficientlyFollow these guidelines when cutting objects in the model:

• Avoid part facesAvoid creating cuts that are exactly on the part planes or go through vertices. Try to position the cut at least 0.3 mm outside of the part planes.

• Use polygon cutsWhenever possible, use polygon cuts. The Cut part with polygon command automatically extends the cut slightly outside of the part face. Note that after creating the polygon, you may have to adjust the position of the handles manually.

• Use edge chamfersWhenever possible, use edge chamfers instead of small cuts, especially in components.

• Tips for flange cutsWhen cutting a flange, if the cutting part cuts very slightly the web as well (at least 0.3 mm), the cut is more likely to succeed. For example, if you are cutting a beam that has roundings, it may be useful to cut even further onto the web than just the flange thickness.

• Tips for round tube cuts

Use the Round tube (23) component for round tube cuts. The component automatically rotates the cutting part until a successful cut position is found. If the component fails, rotate the cutting part slightly until you find a successful cut position.

See also Cuts (115)

Viewing log files

If a cut fails, Tekla Structures displays the cutting part using dash-and-dot lines. An error notification is printed in the session history log stating which part and which cut caused the failure.

To locate the failure in the model, click a row that contains an ID number in the session history log. Tekla Structures selects the corresponding part and cut in the model.

Page 299: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

General modeling tipsModeling tips 299

Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports

Creating a radial gridYou can create a radial grid using a modeling tool called Radial Grid (1). You can preview the grid before creating it.

To create a radial grid:

1. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.2. Select Plugins from the list.3. Double-click RadialGrid to open the properties dialog box.4. Modify the grid properties.

5. Click OK. 6. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.

The grid is created automatically.

In the coordinate properties

• X defines the location of the arched grid lines and the distance between the grid lines.The first value is the radius of the innermost arc.

• Y (degrees) defines the location of the straight grid lines and the distance between the grid lines in degrees.

The first value defines how the grid is rotated. The grid is rotated counter-clockwise from the x axis in the current work plane.

Page 300: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 300

Limitations You cannot edit the radial grid using the general grid properties dialog box.

See also Grid properties (259)

Finding RGB values for colorsTo find RGB values for colors:

1. Log in to the Tekla Extranet.2. Click Tekla Structures > Self learning > Questions and answers.3. Open the Background color in model editor document.4. Download and install the application.

Showing part reference lines in model viewsThe part reference line is formed between the part handles. By default, the part reference line is invisible in the model. It may be useful to display it when snapping to the middle points of parts, for example.

To show the part reference lines in the model:

1. Click View > View Properties...2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.3. On the Advanced tab, select the Part reference line check box.4. Click Modify and OK.

The part reference lines are displayed.

See also Part handles (61)

12.2Tips for creating and positioning partsThese tips will help you to efficiently create and position parts in a model view.

Contents Defining default part properties (301)

Creating curved parts (301)

Creating horizontal parts (302)

Creating beams close to each other (302)

Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (302)

Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams (303)

Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern (304)

Optional ways of placing objects in a model (304)

Page 301: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 301

Modeling identical areas (305)

Defining default part propertiesSave time by saving a default set of properties for each part you plan to create before you start modeling.

To define default sets of part properties for a project:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Enter the part properties you want to use as defaults.3. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the set of properties. For example, enter

BEAM.4. Click Save as to save the set of properties.5. Click OK to close the part properties dialog box.6. Continue to save sets of properties for each type of part you intend to create.7. To make the sets of part properties you have defined the default sets for this project, click Tools

> Defaults > Save Defaults.

Creating curved partsYou can create curved parts by defining a radius and the number of segments for a part. The number of segments determines how realistic the curved part looks: the more segments, the less angular the part appears.

To create a curved part:

1. Create a part that can be bent: a beam, panel, or strip footing.2. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box.3. Go to the Curved beam settings area.

These settings can be found either on the Position tab or on the Bending tab, depending on the part type.

4. In the Radius box, enter the radius.5. In the Number of segments box, enter the number of segments you want to use.6. Optional: Define the plane of curvature, which is relative to the current work plane.7. Click Modify to bend the part.

Examples

To use a default set of part properties, open the part properties dialog box and select an option from the list next to the Load button. Click Load to load the properties.

Number of segments: 2

Page 302: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 302

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Creating horizontal partsWhen creating horizontal parts, such as beams, always pick points in the same direction. For example, pick positions from left to right, and from bottom to top (in positive x, y directions). This ensures that Tekla Structures places and dimensions the parts in the same way in drawings, and that part marks automatically appear at the same part end.

To ensure that beam rotation is correct in drawings, set part Rotation to Top in the part properties dialog box.

Creating beams close to each otherWhen you create beams so that they are located very close to each other Tekla Structures may consider them as a twin profile. To prevent this from happening, use the user attribute MAX_TWIN_SEARCH_DIST in the profile catalog.

To create beams close to each other:

1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the profile catalog.2. Select the desired profile in the profile tree.3. Go to the User attributes tab and set the property Twin profile detection distance to a larger

value than 0, for example to 0.1.4. Click OK.5. Create the beams using the profile.

See also Creating a steel beam (70)

Creating a twin profile (73)

Alternative way of creating a round plate or slabThis example shows an alternative method for creating round plates and slabs.

To create a round plate or slab:

1. Create a diamond-shaped plate or slab with four equal sides.

Number of segments: 5

Number of segments: 15

Page 303: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 303

2. To round the corners, use the arc point chamfer type .

See also Creating a round contour plate (72)

Creating a round slab (83)

Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beamsFor parts that you create by picking only one point (such as columns), you can define the top and bottom level of the part in the global z direction. The part is created at the defined level, not at the level you picked in the model. This can be useful when creating multi-story structures, as you can define exact levels for each part you create.

To define the top and bottom levels of a part:

1. Create a part that requires you to pick only one point.For example, a column.

2. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box.3. Go to the Position tab.4. Modify the top and bottom levels of the part.

• Top: Use to define the top level of the part.

• Bottom: Use to define the bottom level of the part.

5. Click Modify.

Example In this example, the concrete columns form a two-story structure. To position the upper columns correctly, you must modify their bottom level position.

Top level = 1000, Bottom level = 0

Page 304: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 304

See also Modifying the position of a part (64)

Positioning objects in a radial or circular patternTo position objects in a radial or circular pattern, do one of the following:

• Create a grid line and use the Copy Special > Rotate command to copy it.• Use construction lines and circles to position the objects.

See also Creating a single grid line (34)

Rotating objects

Construction objects (43)

Optional ways of placing objects in a modelWhen you want to place an object to a position where no lines or objects intersect, you have the following options:

• Use the snapping commands.

• Use construction planes, lines and circles.• Create points.

See also Snapping to positions

Construction objects (43)

Points (45)

Displaying objects connected to a partIn some cases it is useful to see all the objects that are connected to a part, such as components, welds and fittings. You can then examine, for example, whether parts are welded correctly.

To display the objects connected to a part:

1. Select the part.

2. Delete the part.

Top level = 1700, Bottom level = 1200

Slab thickness = 200

Page 305: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Tips for creating and positioning partsModeling tips 305

3. Click Edit > Undo, or click .The part and the accompanying objects are displayed.

See also Showing and hiding objects (131)

Modeling identical areasMost structures contain identical areas, from simple frames to entire floors. Save time by modeling these areas once, then copying them throughout the model. For example, create a column with a base plate and cap plate, then copy the column to all the locations where it occurs in the model.

You can use this technique to create and reproduce any identical area. Depending on the project, you may even be able to add connections before copying the area of the building.

See also Copying and moving objects

For a project that has several identical floors, try modeling an entire floor, then copying it to several levels.

Page 306: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

306

#3D

models..........................................................................17views.............................................................................42

3D viewsproperty files ............................................................263

4D tool, see visualizing project status......................143

aabsolute coordinates........................................................31accuracy

in modeling...............................................................136of parts.......................................................................136

accuracy, see high accuracy ........................................136angle dimensions ............................................................239angles .................................................................................154arcs......................................................................................233

measuring .................................................................154assemblies...........................................................................73

adding objects ................................................... 76, 77changing the main assembly.................................78changing the main part ..........................................78comparing .................................................................167creating........................................................................74examples......................................................................79exploding.....................................................................79highlighting ................................................................78joining ..........................................................................78lotting ........................................................................197nested assemblies ............................................. 76, 77numbering...................................................... 173, 175removing objects.......................................................78showing and hiding................................................136sub-assemblies ..........................................................74using bolts to create assemblies ..........................74using welds to create assemblies.........................75

attaching parts ................................................................122

bbackground color

changing...................................................................... 25examples ..................................................................... 25

beamscambering .................................................................121concrete beams ............................................... 82, 274concrete polybeams ................................................. 82curved beams............................................................. 71orthogonal beams..................................................... 72steel beams....................................................... 70, 268steel polybeams......................................................... 70warping......................................................................119

bending..............................................................................301bolts.................................................................... 74, 91, 285

bolt group position................................................... 93bolt group shape....................................................... 92bolt offsets ................................................................. 93bolt spacing..............................................................155bolting sub-assemblies ........................................... 74clash checking .........................................................165creating ............................................................... 92, 94modifying .................................................................... 94

box profiles.......................................................................206

cc profiles............................................................................202cambering parts ..............................................................121cast in place ....................................................................... 87cast units............................................................................. 84

adding non-concrete objects ................................ 86adding objects ........................................................... 85cast unit type............................................................. 87casting direction ........................................87, 88, 89changing the main part .......................................... 86creating ....................................................................... 85exploding..................................................................... 87highlighting................................................................ 86lotting ........................................................................197numbering.................................................................175removing objects ...................................................... 86top-in-form face....................................................... 89

Page 307: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

307

chamfering........................................................................111corner chamfer dimensions .................................112corner chamfer types.............................................112corner chamfers ......................................................111edge chamfers .........................................................113in sketches ................................................................247

checkingsketched cross sections.........................................245

checking the model ........................................................151keyboard shortcuts .................................................168

circles .................................................................................233circular hollow sections ................................................208circular sections ..............................................................207Clash Check Manager ......................................... 156, 157clash checking ............................................ 156, 157, 166

bolts ............................................................................165changing priority.....................................................160changing status.......................................................159comments....................................................... 161, 162grouping clashes .....................................................160history ........................................................................162list of clashes ...........................................................159managing results ....................................................159previewing before printing...................................163printing lists of clashes .............................. 163, 164saving clashes ..........................................................164searching...................................................................163sessions......................................................................164symbols ......................................................................158ungrouping clashes ................................................161

class ............................................................................69, 265classifying information .................................................189classifying objects

Model Organizer......................................................193clip planes .........................................................................129coincident contraints.....................................................235cold rolled profiles..........................................................208colliding objects ..............................................................156

colorsbackground color ...................................................... 25background color examples ................................... 25color settings for object groups .........................266color settings for parts..........................................265finding RGB values.................................................300for parts....................................................................... 69grid color............................................................. 29, 33object groups ...........................................................141

columnsconcrete columns ........................................... 81, 273positioning................................................................303steel columns................................................... 69, 267

combining parts ....................................................121, 122comments

in clash checking ..........................................161, 162comparing parts or assemblies ...................................167components

keyboard shortcuts.................................................138showing and hiding................................................137

concrete parts.................................................................... 80beams................................................................. 82, 274cast units..................................................................... 84casting direction ....................................................... 88columns ............................................................. 81, 273pad footings ..................................................... 81, 272panels................................................................. 84, 276polybeams................................................................... 82slabs.................................................................... 83, 275strip footings.................................................... 81, 272warping......................................................................119

constraints ........................................................................234coincident .................................................................235deleting......................................................................237fixed............................................................................236horizontal..................................................................236parallel .......................................................................234perpendicular ...........................................................235vertical .......................................................................237

construction objects ........................................................ 43construction circles.................................................. 44construction lines ..................................................... 44construction planes.................................................. 43

contour plates.................................................. 71, 72, 269

Page 308: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

308

control numbers ..............................................................176assigning to parts ...................................................177directions...................................................................177displaying in model ................................................178example .....................................................................180locking........................................................................179order ...........................................................................177removing....................................................................179settings ......................................................................294unlocking...................................................................179

coordinatescoordinate system .................................................... 29

copyingobject groups ...........................................................139object representation settings ............................142project status visualizations................................144

corner chamfers ....................................................111, 291types and dimensions ............................................112

Page 309: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

309

creatingassemblies........................................................... 73, 74beams close to each other ...................................302bolts ..............................................................................92cast units.....................................................................85clip planes .................................................................129concrete beams .........................................................82concrete columns......................................................81concrete panels .........................................................84concrete polybeams .................................................82concrete slabs ............................................................83construction circles..................................................44construction lines .....................................................44construction planes..................................................43contour plates.................................................... 71, 72curved beams .............................................................71fittings .......................................................................114grid lines......................................................................34grid views....................................................................39grids ..............................................................................31holes ..................................................................... 95, 96logical areas .............................................................191lots ..............................................................................198models..........................................................................18nested assemblies .....................................................77object groups ...........................................................138object representation settings ............................140object type categories ...........................................191orthogonal beams.....................................................72pad footings ...............................................................81parts..............................................................................63project status visualizations ................................143screenshots ...............................................................129sections......................................................................191sequences..................................................................196single bolts..................................................................94sketched cross sections.........................................232slabs..............................................................................83standard-part models ............................................183steel beams.................................................................70steel columns .............................................................69steel polybeams.........................................................70storys ..........................................................................191strip footings..............................................................81

sub-assemblies .......................................................... 74tile patterns..............................................................106twin profiles ............................................................... 73views............................................................................. 36welds .......................................................... 97, 99, 100

cross sectionscross section sketch editor...................................229sketching cross sections .......................................229

curved parts.............................................................. 71, 301Custom Inquiry ................................................................152

adding attributes ....................................................153modifying contents ................................................152

cuts .....................................................................................115hints and tips ...........................................................298line cuts...........................................................115, 117part cuts ..........................................................116, 118polygon cuts...................................................116, 117

ddefault views

property files............................................................263defining object group properties................................192deleting

logical areas .............................................................194object types ..............................................................194

detail properties ..............................................................285DGN

supported objects ..................................................... 58diagnosing model .................................................166, 167dimensions

angle...........................................................................239between two points ...............................................239deleting from a sketch ..........................................241horizontal..................................................................240in sketching..............................................................237radial ..........................................................................238vertical .......................................................................240

display settings................................................................264displaying

control numbers......................................................178distances

measuring .................................................................154dividing models ...............................................................195

Page 310: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

310

eedge chamfers ............................................ 111, 113, 291end offsets ........................................................................284erection schedules ............................................... 145, 147erection sequences .........................................................194exact lines.........................................................................135examining

reference model contents.......................................56examining the model .....................................................125examples

assemblies...................................................................79background colors ....................................................25creating object groups ..........................................145creating object representation settings ...........146creating project status visualization settings 146creating symmetric C-shaped cross section ...251defining erection schedules .................................145numbering........................ 180, 185, 186, 187, 188tile pattern definition ............................................107visualizing erection schedules ............................147visualizing project status......................................144

explodingassemblies...................................................................79cast units.....................................................................87

exportingsketched cross sections.........................................251

extrusion types ................................................................248

ffamily numbers................................................................173

example .....................................................................185modifying ..................................................................174

findingclashes .......................................................................157

finding distant objects ..................................................167fittings................................................................................114fixed constraints .............................................................236flying through model .....................................................128folded plates.....................................................................211footings......................................................................81, 272

gglobal coordinate system ............................................... 29grid lines.............................................................................. 33

creating ....................................................................... 34deleting........................................................................ 34modifying .................................................................... 34properties ..................................................................260

grid viewscreating ....................................................................... 39properties ..................................................................264

gridscoordinates................................................................. 31creating ....................................................................... 31deleting........................................................................ 32grid color............................................................. 29, 33labels .................................................................... 30, 32line extensions........................................................... 30modifying .................................................................... 32origin ............................................................................ 30properties ..................................................................259work plane grid ......................................................... 28

groupingclashes .......................................................................160

hhandles ................................................................................ 61

of positioning planes .............................................244hat profiles .......................................................................217hiding

assemblies.................................................................136components..............................................................137cut lines.....................................................................298grid labels ................................................................... 32part labels ................................................................... 63positioning planes ..................................................243reference lines .........................................................300reference models ...................................................... 53selected parts...........................................................134top-in-form face....................................................... 89unselected parts......................................................134work area .................................................................... 27

high accuracy...................................................................136

Page 311: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

311

highlightingassemblies...................................................................78cast units.....................................................................86reference models.......................................................53

hints and tips, see tips ..................................................297history

of clashes ..................................................................162holes ......................................................................94, 95, 96horizontal constraints ...................................................236horizontal dimensions ...................................................240horizontal position .........................................................282

ii beams (concrete) ..........................................................218i beams (steel)..................................................................201i profiles.............................................................................200identical

areas ...........................................................................305parts............................................................................170reinforcements.........................................................171

importingpoints ...........................................................................45sketched cross sections.........................................250

inquiringmodels........................................................................151object properties .......................................... 151, 152

irregular beams (concrete) ...........................................221

jjoining assemblies ............................................................78

kkeyboard shortcuts

for checking the model .........................................168for component representation options.............138for part representation options ..........................137for viewing the model ...........................................131

ll profiles.............................................................................201labels

part labels ................................................................... 62ledger beams (concrete) ...............................................219length

modifying part length ............................................. 66levels...................................................................................303line cuts ...................................................................115, 117lines

exact...........................................................................135local coordinate system.................................................. 29logical areas ...........................................................189, 191

viewing ......................................................................193lotting ................................................................................197

adding parts .............................................................198creating .....................................................................198deleting......................................................................199removing ...................................................................199

mmain entry

subentry.....................................................................161measuring objects ..........................................................153

angles.........................................................................154arcs .............................................................................154bolt spacing..............................................................155distances ...................................................................154

Mini Toolbarmodifying part position .......................................... 64

Model Editorscreen layout.............................................................. 23

model objectscolors..........................................................................141

Model Organizer .............................................................189classifying .................................................................193

model templatemodifying .................................................................... 22

Page 312: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

312

modelinghints and tips ...........................................................297identical areas .........................................................305more accurately.......................................................136parametric modeling..............................................199rendered or plan view?............................................35

Modeling of floor bay (66) ...........................................120modeling views

surface views..............................................................39models

about 3D models.......................................................17checking for errors .................................................151creating........................................................................18dividing into phases ...............................................195examining .................................................................125flying through model .............................................128inquiring ....................................................................151moving .......................................................................127numbering.................................................................169organizing .................................................................189rotating......................................................................126saving ...........................................................................19viewing ......................................................................125zooming.....................................................................125

modifyinglogical areas .............................................................191object types ..............................................................191parts..............................................................................63

modifying model template.............................................22moving

models in a view .....................................................127positioning planes ..................................................243

multi-story structures ...................................................303

nnested assemblies ..................................................... 76, 77

numbering...............................................................169, 174about numbering ....................................................169assemblies.................................................................175cast units...................................................................175checking and repairing..........................................184clearing......................................................................182control numbers............. 176, 177, 178, 179, 180examples .................................... 185, 186, 187, 188family numbers....................................173, 174, 185history ........................................................................184identical parts..........................................................170modifying ..................................................................182numbering series...........................................172, 173preliminary numbers..............................................176reinforcement ................................................171, 176sequences..................................................................195series ......................................................171, 172, 174settings ..................................................292, 293, 294standard-part model..............................................183user-defined attributes.........................................171what affects .............................................................170

numbering settings ........................................................292

oobject groups ...................................................................138

color settings ...........................................................266colors..........................................................................141copying to another model....................................139creating .....................................................................138deleting......................................................................139example .....................................................................145transparency settings ............................................267

object propertiesdefining properties .................................................192object group properties.........................................192

object property report templates ...............................151object representation settings ....................................139

copying ......................................................................142creating .....................................................................140deleting......................................................................143example .....................................................................146

object type categories ...................................................193

Page 313: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

313

object types ......................................................................189viewing ......................................................................193

objectsclash checking .........................................................156connected to a part................................................304defining visibility ....................................................132finding distant objects ..........................................167inquiring properties..................................... 151, 152measuring .................................................................153numbering.................................................................174placing objects in model.......................................304positioning................................................................304showing and hiding................................................131

offsets ................................................................................284opening

models..........................................................................19organizing properties.....................................................192organizing the model.....................................................189orthogonal beams...........................................................270

positioning................................................................303others .................................................................................228overlapping

numbering series.....................................................174views...........................................................................297

oversized holes ..................................................................96

ppad footings .............................................................81, 272

positioning................................................................303page margins....................................................................164page orientation..............................................................164panels .........................................................................84, 223panning..............................................................................127paper size ..........................................................................164parallel constraints.........................................................234parametric modeling......................................................199

profiles .......................................................................200parametric profiles ...........................................................68part add, see attaching parts ......................................122part labels ...........................................................................62

showing and hiding..................................................63part properties .................................................................267part reference lines ........................................................300

partsadding to assembly .................................................. 77assemblies................................................................... 73bending......................................................................301cambering .................................................................121changing the color ................................................... 69changing the material............................................. 68changing the profile ................................................ 67colors..........................................................................265combining .................................................................121comparing.................................................................167concrete parts............................................................ 80creating ....................................................................... 63curved parts..............................................................301cutting with another part ..........................116, 118default properties ...................................................301handles ........................................................................ 61hiding .........................................................................134horizontal parts.......................................................302identical parts..........................................................170keyboard shortcuts.................................................137labels .................................................................... 62, 63lotting ........................................................................198modifying .................................................................... 63modifying part length ............................................. 66modifying part shape............................................... 65numbering.......................................................172, 174position................................................................ 61, 64position settings .....................................................277properties .................................................................... 61sequences........................................................195, 196showing only selected parts ................................134showing with exact lines......................................135showing with high accuracy ...............................136splitting .....................................................................123steel parts ................................................................... 69user-defined attributes.........................................277warping......................................................................119

perpendicular constraints.............................................235phases ......................................................................194, 195

in numbering............................................................187plane of curvature ..........................................................301plane views......................................................................... 42

Page 314: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

314

points....................................................................................45importing.....................................................................45properties ..................................................................260

polybeams ................................................................... 70, 82polygon cuts.......................................................... 116, 117polygon shapes ................................................................118polygon welds ....................................................................99polylines.............................................................................232position

depth ..........................................................................279end offsets ................................................................284horizontal..................................................................282on the work plane...................................................277part position settings.............................................277rotation......................................................................279vertical .......................................................................281

positioning planes ..........................................................241handles.......................................................................244moving .......................................................................243reverting to default ................................................245

prefixesprofile name prefixes...............................................68weld size prefix..........................................................99

preliminary numbers ......................................................176preparing parts for welding .............................. 100, 101previewing

lists of clashes .........................................................163printing

lists of clashes .........................................................163screenshots ...............................................................130

priorityin clash checking ....................................................160

profiles .................................................................................67parametric.........................................................68, 200prefixes ........................................................................68separators....................................................................68sketched profiles .....................................................249standard.......................................................................67twin profiles ...............................................................73user-defined ...............................................................68

project setupupdating project information................................47

project status visualizations........................................143copying ......................................................................144creating .....................................................................143deleting......................................................................144example ...........................................................144, 146

propertiesdefault........................................................................301project properties ..................................................... 47

rradial dimensions............................................................238Radial Grid (1)..................................................................299radius..................................................................................301rectangular hollow sections ........................................207rectangular sections ......................................................207redrawing views ................................................................ 42reference lines .................................................................300reference model objects ................................................. 57reference models............................................................... 51

clash checking .........................................................156contents....................................................................... 56examining ................................................................... 56hiding ........................................................................... 53highlighting................................................................ 53inserting ...................................................................... 51modifying properties................................................ 53splitting into reference objects ............................ 58supported DGN objects ........................................... 58updating ...................................................................... 54viewing changes ....................................................... 54viewing layers ............................................................ 55

refreshing views ................................................................ 42reinforcement

identical.....................................................................171numbering.......................................................171, 176

relative coordinates ......................................................... 31rendered views .................................................................. 37

representation options..........................................132repairing

numbering errors ....................................................184repairing model .....................................................166, 167report templates

for inquiring object properties............................151

Page 315: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

315

representation options ..................................................132restoring default work plane .........................................29reverting

to default positioning planes ..............................245to old clash checking functionality ...................166

RGB values........................................................................300right-hand rule ................................................................297rotating

models........................................................................126parts............................................................................279rotation settings......................................................261

rotation angle knob..........................................................64round

holes .............................................................................95plates..................................................................72, 302slabs....................................................................83, 302

ssaving

clashes .......................................................................164models.................................................................. 19, 20sketched cross sections.........................................246

screen layoutin Model Editor..........................................................23

screenshotscreating......................................................................129in Windows Vista ....................................................130printing ......................................................................130saving in bitmap format .......................................130settings ......................................................................261

searchingclashes .......................................................................163

sections..............................................................................191selection dial ......................................................................64

sequences..........................................................................195adding parts .............................................................196creating .....................................................................196deleting......................................................................197inquiring....................................................................197modifying ..................................................................197

settingsbolt properties .........................................................285color settings .................................................265, 266concrete beam properties.....................................274concrete column properties.................................273concrete panel properties.....................................276concrete slab properties .......................................275contour plate properties .......................................269corner chamfer properties....................................291detail properties......................................................285display settings........................................................264edge chamfer properties.......................................291general modeling settings....................................259grid line properties .................................................260grid properties .........................................................259grid view properties ...............................................264numbering settings ............................292, 293, 294orthogonal beam properties ................................270pad footing properties...........................................272part position settings ............................................277part properties.........................................................267point properties.......................................................260rotation settings .....................................................261screenshot settings ................................................261steel beam properties ............................................268steel column properties ........................................267strip footing properties .........................................272transparency settings ............................................267twin profile properties ..........................................271view properties........................................................262view settings ............................................................262weld properties........................................................287

shapemodifying part shape............................................... 65

shifting the work plane................................................... 28

Page 316: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

316

showingassemblies.................................................................136components ..............................................................137cut lines .....................................................................298parts labels .................................................................63parts with exact lines ............................................135parts with high accuracy......................................136positioning planes ..................................................243reference lines .........................................................300top-in-form face.......................................................89views.............................................................................41work area ....................................................................27

single bolts..........................................................................94single grid lines .................................................................33single-part welds ............................................................100Sketch Browser................................................................230sketch editor.....................................................................229sketched cross sections.................................................229

adding constraints..................................................234adding dimensions..................................................237arcs..............................................................................233chamfers....................................................................247checking ....................................................................245circles .........................................................................233creating......................................................................232creating images.......................................................249example .....................................................................251exporting ........................................................ 250, 251extrusion types ........................................................248importing...................................................................250modifying ..................................................................246polylines.....................................................................232positioning planes ............................. 241, 242, 244profiles .......................................................................249refining the shape...................................................234saving .........................................................................246sketch thickness ......................................................247using in models .......................................................249variables ....................................................................231

slabs......................................................................................83warping........................................................... 119, 120

slotted holes .......................................................................95snapping

to middle points ......................................................300

snapshots, see screenshots ..........................................129splitting

parts............................................................................123plates and slabs.......................................................123

standard profiles ............................................................... 67standard-part models....................................................183status

in clash checking ..........................................159, 160steel parts ........................................................................... 69

assemblies................................................................... 73beams................................................................. 70, 268columns ............................................................. 69, 267contour plates.......................................... 71, 72, 269curved beams............................................................. 71orthogonal beams........................................... 72, 270polybeams................................................................... 70twin profiles ..................................................... 73, 271

storys..................................................................................191creating multi-story structures ..........................303

strip footings............................................................ 81, 272sub-assemblies .................................................................. 74

bolting to existing assembly.................................. 74welding to existing assembly ................................ 75

surface treatment...........................................................101adding ........................................................................103creating new surface treatments.......................105modifying ..................................................................102on all faces of part .................................................103on chamfered parts................................................104on cut faces..............................................................103on part face..............................................................103on parts with openings and recesses................104on selected areas ....................................................103tiled surface treatment ...............................102, 106

surface views ..................................................................... 39switching between

views............................................................................. 42

tt profiles ............................................................................203t profiles (concrete)........................................................220testing

sketched cross sections.........................................245

Page 317: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

317

tiled surface treatment .................................................106creating new tile patterns....................................106pattern definition example ..................................107pattern definitions..................................................109pattern elements.....................................................110

tipsactivating overlapping views...............................297creating beams close to each other ..................302creating curved parts.............................................301creating horizontal parts ......................................302creating round plates and slabs .........................302cutting efficiently ...................................................298defining default part properties .........................301displaying objects connected to a part ............304finding RGB values for colors..............................300hiding cut lines........................................................298modeling identical areas ......................................305placing objects in model.......................................304positioning columns, pad footings and orthogonal beams...................................................303positioning objects in radial or circular pattern .......................................................................304right-hand rule ........................................................297showing part reference lines ...............................300

top-in-form face...............................................................89transparency settings ....................................................267twin profiles .............................................................73, 271

uu profiles ...........................................................................202ungrouping

clashes .......................................................................161user interface

in Model Editor..........................................................23user-defined attributes .................................................277

in numbering............................................................171user-defined profiles........................................................68

vvariable cross sections ..................................................226variables

in parametric modeling.........................................199in sketching..............................................................231

vertical constraints.........................................................237vertical dimensions ........................................................240vertical position ..............................................................281view depth ........................................................................131view planes......................................................................... 37

moving ......................................................................... 38view settings ....................................................................262viewing

keyboard shortcuts.................................................131logical areas .............................................................193models..............................................................125, 129numbering history ..................................................184object types ..............................................................193reference model contents ...................................... 56sequence numbers..................................................197

views..................................................................................... 343D views....................................................................263arranging..................................................................... 42closing.......................................................................... 42creating ....................................................................... 36default views............................................................263deleting........................................................................ 41modifying .................................................................... 41naming......................................................................... 36opening........................................................................ 41overlapping...............................................................297properties ..................................................................262refreshing.................................................................... 42surface views ............................................................. 39switching between views ....................................... 42temporary.................................................................... 36view planes................................................................. 37view types ................................................................... 37

visibility of objects ...............................................131, 132visualizing project status..............................................143

Page 318: 92421889 Modeling Guide 180 Enu

Index

318

wwarping

beams .........................................................................119concrete parts..........................................................119concrete slabs ............................................... 119, 120

weld preparation.................................................. 100, 101welded beam profiles.....................................................204welded box profiles ........................................................204welds ..........................................................................97, 287

between parts ............................................................97creating...................................................... 97, 99, 100numbering.................................................................293polygon welds ............................................................99single-part welds ....................................................100weld position..............................................................98weld preparation.......................................... 100, 101weld size prefixes......................................................99weld types.................................................................289welding sub-assemblies ..........................................75

wire frame views............................................................... 37work area .................................................................. 27, 131

defining ....................................................................... 27hiding ........................................................................... 27

work plane .......................................................................... 28restoring ...................................................................... 29shifting......................................................................... 28

workspacein Model Editor.......................................................... 23

wq profiles ........................................................................207

zz profiles............................................................................201zooming

with keyboard shortcuts .......................................126zoom settings ..........................................................126

zooming in or out ...........................................................125